(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Ontario Teachers' Manuals - Household Management"

N • N 

Property of OISE/UT Library 
Please return to 252 Bloor St. West 
Attention: Kathy Imrie 

OHEC 
375 
.00971 
059DE\O 
v.9 



A Hou-ehold Manaffement pupil in uniform 



()NTARIO 
TECI-IER,q' ,XlANUALS 

AUTHORIZED BY THE MINISTER oF EDUCATION 

TORONTO 
TI4E COPP, CLARK COMPANY. LIMITED 



{'(II'Rlf;IlI", ('ANAI».t. I91r, IW 
THI -[INI.TEI F EI)U('ATII}N FOR ()NTAIll) 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 
COURSE OF STUDY--DETAILS ......................... 1 

CHAPTER I 
Introduction ...................................... 5 
Correlation with Other School Subjects ............. 7 
Rooms ............................................ 9 
Equipment ........................................ 12 
Tables, seats, racks, sinks, class cupboard, stores, 
black-boards, illustrative material, book-case, 
utensils ..................................... 23 
Equipment for Twenty-four Pupils .................. 23 
Class table, sink and walls, general cupboard 
equipment, kitchen linen, cleaning cupboard, 
laundry equipment, dining-room equipment. 
miscellaneous ............................... 28 
Equipment for Ordinary Class-rooms ................ 28 
Equipment, Packing-box ............................ 30 
For Class ..................................... 31 
Individual Equipment for Six Pupils ............ 32 

C HA.PTER II , 
Suggestions for Class Management .................. 33 
Teachers' Preparation .......................... 33 
Number in Class .............................. 33 
Uniforms. etc .................................. 33 
Discipline ..................................... 34 
Division of Periods ............................ 35 
Assignment of Work ........................... 36 
Supplies ...................................... 37 
Practice Work at Home ........................ 37 
Suggestions. General ............................... 38 
Suggestions for Schools with Limited or no Equipment 39 
C|LkPTER III. FOR.[ III: JU.xIOR GRADE 
Correlations ...................................... 42 
Arithmetic. geography, nature study, hygiene. 
physical training, composition, spelling, manual 
training, art, sewing ......................... 45 

CHAPTER IV. FoRI III: SET,IOR GRADE 
Scope of Household Management ................... 46 
Equipment. Uniform, etc., Survey of ................ 47 
Equipment, Use of ................................. 48 



ri HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

CH.«PTE IV. Fomi III: SE.'JOP, GR.DE--Coztinued PAVE 
Cleaning, Development of a Lesson on 
Meaning of Cleaning .......................... 49 
Methods of Cleaning ........................... 49 
Common Household Cleansing Agents .......... 50 
Black-board Outline ........................... 51 
Dish Washing ................................. 52 
Table Cleaning ................................ 53 
Sink Cleaning ................................. 54 
Dusting ....................................... 54 
Measures and Recipes 
Measures ...................................... 55 
Equivalent Measures and Weights, Table of ...... 58 
hleasuring, Plan of Lesson on .................. 58 
Time limit, preparation, development, prac- 
tical work to apply measuring, serving, 
note-taking, housekeeping, recipe for cocoa 62 
Recipes ......................................... 62 

CHAPTER V. FOR,I III: SE'«o (R.*,DE (Continued) 
Cookery 
hleaning of Cooking ........................... 64 
Reasons for Cooking Food ..................... 64 
Kinds of Heat Used ........................... 64 
Different Ways of Applying Dry Heat .......... 64 
Different Ways of Applying Moist Heat ......... 64 
Thermometer, Lesson on ....................... 65 
Boiling Carrots, Plan of Lesson on ............. 68 
Aire, rime limit, prelaaration for practical 
work; practical work: development of the 
ideas of boiling as a method of cooking; 
serving, housekeeping, recipe in detail .... 70 
Simmering Apples, Plan of Lesson on .......... 70 
Introduction, discussion of recipe, practical 
work, development of ideas of simmering: 
serviug, housekeeping, recipe (individual) 72 
Methods of Cooking: Details ................... 7 
Boiling ................................... 73 
Simmering ................................ 74 
Steaming .................................. 74 
Steeping .................................. 75 
Toasting .................................. 76 
Broiling .................................. 76 
Pan-broiling ............................... 77 
Sautéing .................................. 78 
Baking ................................... 78 
Frying .................................... 79 



CONTENTS vil 

CHAPTER V. FORM III: SE.Xlon GRAvE--Continucd PAGE 
Left-overs, Suggestions for the Use of .......... 82 
Bread, cake, meat, fish, eggs, cheese, vege- 
tables, canned fruit ...................... 84 
Beverages ..................................... 84 
Meaning of Beverages ..................... 84 
Kinds of Beverages ....................... 85 
Tea, coffee, cocoa, chocolate ................ 86 
Table Setting ................................. 
Table Manners ................................ 90 

CI-IAPTER VI. FOR.X IV: Jv.oa GRADE 
Kitchen Fire, The ................................. 92 
Requirements ................................. 93 
Heat, oxygen, fuels ........................ 96 
Kitchen Store, The ................................ 96 
Fireless Cooker, The .............................. 99 
Principles of Fireless Cooker ................... 100 
Reasons for Use of Fireless Cooker ............ 100 
Ways of Using Fieless Cooker ................. 100 
Home-ruade Fireless Cooker, A ..................... 101 

CHAPTER VII. FoR)t IV: Juon Gn.DE (Continued) 
Food, Study of .................................... 103 
Uses of Food .................................. 103 
Necessary Substances in Food .................. 105 
Sources of Food ............................... 106 
Common Foods, Study of ...................... 106 
Milk ...................................... 107 
Eggs ...................................... 110 
Vegetable Food, Study of ...................... 114 
Comparative food value of different parts of 
plants ................................... 119 
Green vegetables, root vegetables and 
tubers, ripe seeds (peas, beans, and 
lentils) ............................. 120 
Vegetables. General Rules for Cooking .......... 122 
Fruit, General Rules for Cooking ............... 123 
Fresh Fruit ............................... 123 
Dried Fruit ............................... 123 
Starch, Use of, to Thicken Liquids ............. 124 
Flour, Use of. to Thicken Liquids .............. 125 
Cream of Vegetable Soups ...................... 126 
Principles of Cream Soups ..................... 126 
Seeds. Outline of Lesson on Cooking ............ 127 
Cereals ................................... 127 
Legumes: Peas, Beans, Lentils ............. 128 
Nuts ...................................... 128 



viii HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

('HAPTER VII. FORI IV: Jty'IOR GR XDE--Cotiued P x6E 
Salads ........................................ 129 
Ingredients of Salads ...................... 129 
Food Values of Salads ..................... 129 
Preparation of Ingredients ................. 130 
Dressings for Salads ....................... 130 
Minerai Food, Study of ........................ 131 
Summary of Sources of Mineral Foods ...... 133 
Diet .............................................. 133 
Reference Table of Food Constituents ........... 134 
Water, minerai marrer, protein, sugar, starch, 
fat ...................................... 134 
Preparing and Serving Meals: Rules ............... 136 

CHAPTER VIII. FORM IV: J''1Oa GRADE (Continued) 
House. Care of the ................................. 138 
Bed-room, Directions for Care of ............... 138 
Sweeping, Directions for ....................... 139 
Dusting, Directions for ........................ 140 
lIetals, Care and Cleaning of ................... 140 
Iron or steel, tin, granite and enamel ware, 
aluminium, zinc, galvanized iron, copper or 
brass, silver, recipe for silver polish ...... 144 

CHAPTEa IX. For..[ IV: JUSIOR GRADE (Continued) 
Laundry Work .................................... 145 
White Cotton and Linen Clothes, Lesson on 
Washing .................................... 145 
Materials--water. alkalies, soap, soap sub- 
stitutes or adjuncts, blueing, starch ...... 149 
Preparation for Washing .................. 150 
Process of Washing ....................... 151 
Removal of Stains ......................... 152 
Woollens, Outline of Lessons on Washing ....... 153 
Experiments with Cloth Made of Wood Fibre 154 
Points in Washing Woollens ................ 156 
Steps in Washing Woollens ................ 156 

CHAI>TER X. FORI IV: SE-;IOR GRADE 
Foods ............................................ 157 
Food. Preservation of ......................... 158 
Bacteria .................................. 158 
Canning .................................. 160 
Jams and Preserves ....................... 163 
JeIly ...................................... 164 
Pickling .................................. 165 



CONTENTS ix 

CHAPTER XI. Fonxt IV: SE.XOn GRADE (Continued) PA6E 
Cookery .......................................... 166 
Flour. Outline of Lesson on .................... 166 
Sources of flour, kinds of flour ruade from 
wheat, composition of white flour, kinds of 
wheat flour, tests for bread flour .......... 16_7 
Flour Mixtures, Outline of Series of Lessons on .. 168 
Meaning of flour mixtures, kinds of flour 
mixtures, methods of mixing flour mix- 
tures, framework of flour mixtures, light- 
ening agents used in flour mixtures ...... 169 
Experiments .............................. 170 
Baking-powder ............................ 170 
Cake making .................................. 171 
Classes of cake, directions for making cake, 
rules for mixing cake, directions for baking 
cake .................................... 173 
Recipe for Basic Cake ......................... 174 
Variations of Recipe for Basic Cake ............ 174 
Spice cake, nut cake, fruit cake, chocolate 
cake .................................... 174 
Recipe for Basic Biscuits ...................... 175 
Variations of Recipe for Basic Biscuits ......... 175 
Sweet biscuit, fruit biscuit, scones, fruit 
scones, short cake for fruit, dumplings for 
stew, steamed fruit pudding .............. 175 
Bread Making ................................. 176 
Yeast, Outline of Lessons on ............... 177 
Bread Making, Practical ....................... 179 
Ingredients of plain bread, amount of in- 
gredients for one small loaf, process in 
making bread ........................... 180 
Breads, Fancy ................................ 180 
Bread-mixer, Tle .............................. 182 
Pastry ........................................ 183 
Pastry, outline of lesson on--ingredients... 184 
Notes on flour, fat, water; lightening 
agents used in pastry; kinds of pastry; 
amount of ingredients for plain pastry 
for one pie .......................... 184 

CHAPTER XII. FORSI IV: SENIOR G,gADE (Continued) 
Meat ............................................. 186 
Names of Meat ................................ 187 
Parts of Meat ................................. 188 
Composition of Fat ............................ 188 
Composition of Bone ........................... 188 
Composition of Muscle ......................... 190 



X I-IOUSEHO LD MANAGEMENT 

CIAPEa XII. FO. IV: SENIOP. Ge..)E--Continued ]'A6 
Meat Experiments ............................ 191 
Selection of Meat .............................. 192 
Care of Meat .................................. 193 
General Ways of Preparing Meat ............... 193 
Notes on Tough Meat .......................... 193 
Digestibility of Meat .......................... 195 
General Rules for Cooking Meat ................ 195 
Baking. broiling, boiling, stewing, beef juice. 199 
Fish 
Points of Difference Betwêen Fish and Ordinary 
5Iêat ....................................... 199 
Kinds of Fish ................................. 200 
Selection of Fish .............................. 200 
Cooking of Fish ............................... 200 
Gelatine .......................................... 200 
Source ....................................... 201 
Commercial Forms ............................ 201 
Properties .................................... 201 
Steps in Dissolving ............................ 201 
Value in Diet ................................. 202 
Ways of Using ................................ 202 
Frozen Dishes ..................................... 203 
Value ......................................... 203 
Kinds ........................................ 203 
Watêr icê, fraDé, sherbet, icê cream, plain 
ice cream, mousse ....................... 203 
Practical Work ................................ 204 
Freezing, packing, moulding ............... 204 
Planning of Meals ................................. 205 

Cn.PTP, XIII. FolI IV: SE-IoB G-E (Continued) 
Infant Feeding .................................... 205 
Modified Milk, Recipe for ...................... 209 
Pasteurizing Milk, Directions for ............... 209 
Bottles, Care of ..., ............................ 210 
Food, Care of ................................. 210 
Feeding, Schedule for .......................... 211 

CHPTER XIV. FoP,3I IV: SE.X'IOR GP. XDE (Continued) 
Household Sanitation .............................. 212 
Means of Bacteria Entering the Body ........... 212 
Common Disease-producing Bacteria ........... 213 
Methods of Sanitation ......................... 214 
Disposal of Waste in Villages and Rural Districts 215 
Methods of Disinfecting ....................... 215 



CONTENTS xi 

CEI.kPTR XIV. Fo:.x[ IV: SEXl«»t Gr.ADÇ--Continucd PAGE 
Home Nursing .................................... 216 
Sick Room. The ............................... 216 
Location. furniture, ventilation, care ....... 216 
Disinfecting, Methods of ...................... 218 
Patient, The .................................. 218 
Care of the bed. and diet ................... 218 
Poultices ...................................... 221 
Fomentations ......................  .......... 222 

IBLIOGRAPHY 
Home. The ........................................ 223 
Science and Sanitation ............................ 223 
Food and Dietetics ................................ 223 
Cooking and Serving .............................. 224 
Laundry Work .................................... 224 
Home Nursing .................................... 225 
Economics ........................................ 225 
Magazines ........................................ 225 



PUBLIC AND SEPARATE S('I[[L 
COURSE )F STUDY 

DETAILS 

FOl13I III: .IUNI[}II 

I[ILLS OF I[OU8EIIOLD SI-PI'LIES : 
Furniture, bed and table linen, material for clothing 
Fuel, meat. milk. groceries 
Weeklv or m,mthlv exlwnses «,f an aerage lmusehohl 
('.mparis«m of home and store cost «,f eooked food, 
su,.h as cake. I, rea,1, meat, eanned fruit. 

St'm'Es oi, I IOUSEtlOI D /,[ATERIALS : 
Fuel 
Tituber for buihling, and furni/urc 
{'otf«,n, lichen, w«ollen, paper, china 
('tmtm.n ,gr,,«eries. su«b as sait. su.ar, spiees, tea, 
eoffee, c«}(.«a, ebeee, butter, eer«.als 
('leansigagents, sm.h as e«,al-«,il, gasolene, turpen- 
tine, whiting, baflfiwick, 
MAN'I'FA«'TURE «F II[HEII[LD )[ATERIAL: 
('ott«,n, linen, woollens, paper 
Sali, sugar, tea. e«ffee, e«e«a, eheese, ])utter, cereals. 
KIT['IIEN AXI EQvIPMENT: 
Arrangement of a eonvenient kilehen 
Yecessarv utensils. 
1 



2 IlOUSEHOLD IIANAGEM ENT 

F(}L'M !I[: EXI(}I (IIADE 

'LEANING : 
l':h.mentarv princild,'s «,f cleaniug 
Praetiee in eleaning dishes, lai,les, sinks, towels. 
'OOKERY : 
Table «,f «««,kiug nl,.astm.m,.nts 
A re,.ipe (parts, steps in following) 
lb.astres f«,r «.«,oking f««,d ; khuls «,f ]wat used ; meth««ls 
l'ra«ti,.e in makin simple dishes of one main in- 
gredient. 
EIgVI N(  
Seltin/hc laide 
Table service and manners. 

F(IgII [\': JUNIOR GRADE 
"l'nE K.rr-nEX F: 
Rcquirements of a tire 
l'«,m],arative merits «,f fu,.ls 
(',mstru,.tim and tare of a practical store. 
N'I'['IY OF F«oDS: 
l'se ,f f, md tç, the l»dv 
Necessarv e]emcn[s in 
'empositi¢m of the eollinlol foo,ls, excepting meat 
and fih. 
(-'oOKERY : 
Pra«.th.e ]essons m prcparin a nd c,oking t]e «mnmon 
f,,ads. (milk. e7z». meat. fish. fruit, vegctab]es) 
('o«,king and serring a simple 1,rcakfast and a 
luncheon. 



COURSE OF STUDY 3 

(!ARE OF THE I|OrSE: 
I{eview of methods of elealdng taken iii Forln III 
('leaning and tare of household metals 
Sweeping and dusting 
('are of a bed-room. 
LAt'gl)y,Y \VoK : 
Necessary matCiais and the a[.ti[,n of each 
Process in wa.hing whitc ,-hthes. 
NoTE.--These subjects are intended to be taught simply (hot 
technically). In schools where there is no laundry 
equipment, the order of work may be developed in 
class and the practice carried on at home. 

F(RM IV: SENI(R (;RADE 

PIiE.EIIVATION OF Fool»: 
Causes of decay, prilwiplcs and mcthods of preserva- 
tion 
Practice in eanning. 
('OOKERY : 
Praetice lessons fo rcview co«,kin7common foods 
Flour (kinds, composition of white flour) ; flour mix- 
tures (kinds, met]lods of lnixing, ]ightenin.,_, 
agents) 
Practice in makinz bread and cake 
Practice in «.ooking moat 
('ooking and serving a simple home dinner af a fixed 
cost. 
Conlposition of meat and fish 
Planning meals so as to obtain a broad balance of food 
elements. 



4 HOUSEHOLD MANAGE]IENT 

] NFANT FEEDING " 
Pr.por f,»-d; pasteurizing milk 
l'are ,,f I»,ttles ami fo«,d 
S«hedule f«,r feedinz 

1 I»(',EIIoLI» S I.NIT I.TION : 
Disposal of waste 
Principles and metho,ls of sterilizing and disinfect- 
ing. 

]-OME -URSING : 
Two simple le.sons fo include the following: 
1. The si(-k-rr,.m (location, size. ventilation, eare) 
2. Care of patient's bed, and diet 
3. Making of mustard and other simple poultices. 

NOTE.--Where no equlpment has been provided, a large doll 
and doll's bed will serve. 

LçuNttY 'OK : 
Washing of woollens (th processes). 



HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(IIAP'I'EI f 

INTRODUCTION 

"[NTIL a oomparative]y recent peri-d, edu(.ation was re- 
vardcd lnaitth as a lllCallN Of traininVthe intellect, but 
this eoneeptiol of edu<.ation is llf)W c.ntsidered incomp]cto 
and inadequate. Our ideas «,f the purl,,Se «,f s«.h.«,ls are 
hecoming I»roader, ald we have d«,.id«.d that n«,t only the 
mental nature. Irai ail the «.hihl's a«.tivities and interests, 
should be givelU dire«.ti,,u I,v moans ,»f the traininff gien 
in our s,.h,.,ls. XV«. 1,.lit,ve als,, that these a.tiviti(.s an,! 
i.ter«st «an t,e used te a«hanbtX 
development. 
II,,us(.hohl Managment aires te eduoate in this way, 
l,v directing the mind te ideas («,nnected with the home 
and l,v trainitg the mus,.les t,, l)crfi,rm h,,useh,,hl duties. 
Though dvomed essentially pra«tioal, thi subject wi]l. 
if rightly presented, give a mental training similar te other 
subjects of tbe ('ourse .f Studv. It sht,ul«l de more. 
While a l,upil is ma,le familiar with the duties of ho,me 
life and with tho materials and ap],liances used in 
home. she will I,o unavoidaldv ]ed t,, think of the work of 
the larger w.rld and te realize ber relation te, if. Wheu 
su«h knowh.dgo c..me.s, and a girl begins te fi,el that seine 
part of the w.rld's work del)eds on her, truc character- 
building wil] begin. 
5 
2 .. 



6 ttOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Tbe pul'pose of this Manual is fo assist teachers in 
]»re.entinz H«»u.ehohl .Management fo public and separatc 
s«h«,«,] «.]asses in .u«h a wax a. te» attain these en«]s. If is 
ho]»,_.d that if will be especia]ly u.eful t- those teachers 
wh-.¢e training in thc suhje«.t bas becn limited. 
),n att«.mpt bas been ma«lc t- Cxl»lain thc work of 
F«,rm III Senior, and of the .lunior al«l .%_.ior divisions 
¢»f Form IV. The topics of Form II Junior are hot dis- 
(.ussc,], as the work of tbis F«rm is intended lo l)e taught 
as information lessons, f«r which general metbods wi]l 
sufIi«.c. In /be-othcr F«,rms mcnti«»ned, the topics of 
les.«,n. are outlined in dctai], but the method of presenta- 
ti,n is hot gixen except in typi«al cases. Botb outline 
method are inten(]ed to ])e mere|y suggestive and fo |eave 
,,I»l)«»rttmity for the teacber's originality. 
In cases where te,pics seêm incompletely out]ined, it is 
duc to the faet tbat thcv are trea/ed in «,ther school sub- 
je¢.t. or po.tponc«l mati! the pul)ils reach a more advanced 
stage «,f mettal d(.ve|ol»ment. 
The ordcr of le..-_ons is optional, al.o the amount of 
work cach slmuld include, unless this is sl_)ecially stated. 
Manv lessons are suitable for rural school., which have 
no cquii»nmnt exceit what the ingenuity «,f the teacher 
ma 3" I»rovide. In such .chools, the tcacher ma)" perf«rm the 
practical work, whi|e tbe c]ass observes. 
'l'hr«»ughout the lessons, there is /be diflïcultv of prc- 
senting scientific facts to immature minds in a way that 
wi]| be simple an«] c|ear. The ase of technica] ]anguage 
woud often assist the e.xprc.sion, and tbis is apt to be 
unconsciously employed, but there is danger of such forms 
of speech not being intelligible to the pupils; the teacber 



CORRELATION WITH OTHER SUBJECTS 7 

.,hould thcref.re cho-.c lncr words «arefully. 'l',.«lmi,.al 
terres mav be taught, but this is hot advised in Junior 
«.lasses, unless reallv necessary. If the fa«.ts are intelli- 
gently relatcd to thb exl)criences .f the lmpils, that is all 
that is desired. 
Tcmpcratures. as indieat«.d I»v Fahrenheit ther- 
m«,meters, have ahvavs I»een giron, as this scale is best 
known in the home. 
Since this 3lamal le designcd for teachers, few rceipes 
have bcen furnishcd. The I»ooks of reference which arc 
appendcd will Sul,ply thcsc and additi«,nal inforlnatio ,n 
the subject. 

CORRELATION WITH OTHER SCHOOL SUBJECTS 
One of the be,,efits of pla«ing llou(,hold Management 
in a (_'ourse of Studv is that it r«.latc.; the knowledge 
gained in school te» the h,me life. 
Thc lh,usehohl Malmtzcment h.a«hcr has great oppor- 
tunity for this correiation. ,he shou]d be more than a 
tcacher of househohl duties. She shou]d ]ead the pupil. 
to see the importal,ce and necessitv of mastering the other 
school subjects. Whcrever intcrest il, thesc subjects has 
alreadv I»(?n cstablished, this interest wi]l form a basis for 
development in manv ]hmsehold Management lessons. 
Then, too, the teacher. of other .ubjects should, a. far 
as pos.ible, work with thc ll-usehold .Management tea(.hcr 
in rclating their instruction fo the operations and require- 
ments in the h«,m.. If the t«.a«.hers «.«,«,l»erate in l»lanning 
their lessons, the pupils wi]] re«-oixe a doeper impression of 
the faets |earned in each sul»je«t ad will bave an in- 
ereased interest in the work, through seeing how one 
Iwanch of knowledge is related to another. 



8 HOUSEHO|.I) MANAGEMENT 

Thc f.l].winzwi]! sh.w h-w s«m«. «,f the subjc«'t are 
r.]atcd te, thc elass w.rk of ]h»useh-]d Manag«.m«.nt : 
Aritbmetie.This ul,j«,et 
a.««,unts, it measuroments, in tho divisi,m of roeipes, and 
in «.mputing the c..st «,f f,,,,ds pr«.l,ared f,,r the tal,h.. 
l«ading.oE'he pupils sh«uld l,e asked fo read al.ud the 
re«.ipes and thcir u,,tes and sh,,uhl bu requircd to do this 
distin«'tlv and a¢«.urat«.lv. 
Slwllin . Writing. Lan¢uace Wt,rk.--ln writing recipes 
and t¢»ics, in st, wies «»f h-usch,»ld ¢»pi«.s. nd in written 
answers, the tea(.hcr .h.uhl insist cm neat wrifin, eorree 
slwlling, and «..] E¢ish. 
(;e«»gq»hy.The stu«lv .f matcrids f-r fo.d. cloth- 
inT. and ]muse furntshngs brin7s bcf,»rc the mind out 
ç,»mmer«ia] r«.lati-n» wiih fiweiT c,,untries and the oecu- 
l»ali«»ns of their inhahitants, if a]so suggests considera- 
li.n .f (.limait and s.ils. 
llisl¢»rv.oEhe eoluti.n ¢»f furniture and ulensils, of 
methods (»f hcmsckc«.l»in , and -f preparing and serving 
food. brings «»ni hist,wi«al fa«.ts. 
Eh.m«mtarv S«'i«.li«.e.Thr,,ugh«,ut the ['-ue. this suh- 
joet is the f,,undation ,,f much ¢,f the instrueti.n given, as 
i explains the lwineipl(.s underlying lmusehold industries. 
S,»ap-making Iwead-making. preservaticm of foc.l, and the 
lw«..esses .f e..kingand ('h.aning are examphs «,f lhis. 
S¢»nc know]edge .f e]ementarv «'ienee is a]so neces- 
sarv to an understanding of the c.nstruetion and praetical 
w«,rkin¢ ¢,f the kitchen store, the firoless co-ker, the ereana 
separator, and manv hr, usehold appli«mces. Ils prineiples 
«]eterminc the mcthods of heating, lighfing, and ,qtilatin7. 
PhysioloT and t[yicm.Thc studv 
p]annin ami preparation of meals should include a 
knovledge of the body and ifs requiremenfs. The sanitary 



ROOMS 9 

eare of file ],,,use a,,l ifs pr,.mis,.s is direetly related fo 
hygiene. 
Nature Stu,ly.--Auimals and plants furnish us with 
luost of out food. a,,d falniliarity with these is necessary 
h, the h,,usckeelcr. A kl,,wlcdgc «,f the structure of 
«,uimals i esscntial il, sfudyil,g fhe ¢.uts «,f mcat; the 
structure «,f plants and fhe fu,,.tims «,f thcir diffcrcnt 
1,arts give a key t,, thc value ,,f vegctal,lc 
Physical Training.The class slmuld be carcfully 
traincd throughout in correct muscular movemcnts. The 
positi«m of file bodv slmuhl bc (.h,soh- watchcd in working 
ad in sitting, and the «lassos slmuhl enter and ]cave the 
ro,m in systel,atic order. 
Manual Tl'ainingThe pracIiea] part of housekecping 
dcmands constant use «,f the hands. The teacher shouhl 
l,e watchful «,f awkward handling of materials and 
utensils and bc carcful to correct if. She should require 
dcft, natural movcmcltS until they becomc habits. 
Art.--hlcas of colour and design should be applied in 
«.ho«,singwall-lmpcrs ' carpcts, dishes, furlfiture, and ('h»th- 
ilg. The pupils might bc askcd fo makc original coloured 
desigs for thcse houschold articles. 

ROOMS 
If is most desiral)le tn bave lh)u.elmhl Management in- 
clude ail home operations and, to make-this V, ssihle, more 
than one room should I,e provided. Manv school boards, 
however, in introducing the work, find that one room is 
all that can be aff.rded. Where this is the case. if 
necessary that this room be equipped as a kitchen, though 
if must ],e use,1 for other lmrposes as well. It will serve 
al.«, for ta],le-setting and serving, f,,r .implc laundry work. 
for 



1) HOUSEHOLD IYIANAGEIYIENT 



EQUIPMENT 

This kitchen should I,e large and airy, so that the cla.s 
can u'ork comfortal,l 3 and convetiently. A room having 
greater length than width admits t,f the best arrangement. 
On account of the odours that arise from cooking and 
other domestie operations, the kitchen shou]d be on tbe 
top floor and should have more adequatc means of ven- 
tilation t]lan «»rdinarv class-rooms. A north exposure 
makes it cooler in summer. 

Opposite end of Iffousehold Management class-room, showing 
the black-board and class cut, board 

EQUIPMENT 
In planning an equipmenf, one must be -mi¢]e¢] by fhe 
conditions fo be met. It is ¢]ifficult fo be definite in 
¢]etails, but cerfain general principles should be observed. 
Tbe entire equipmen should be suited fo the needs of 
the pupils, aml it should also I,e mlewhieh it is desirahle 
and possil,lc for them to bave in their own lmnles. 



12 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 



TABLES 13 

The walls and floor should be washable, and they, as 
well as the furniture, should have plain, smooth surfaces 
which do hot catch dust and are easily eleaned. 
The sinks, stoves, taldes, and eUl)l«»ards slmuhl 
lfla«.ed so as fo save stel)S. 

TABLES 
Wherê êconomy is nccêssary, movablê tables may be 
used, but the fixed ones are fo be preferred. The latter 

Section of a table designed for two pupils 

may be placed in the form of a hollow square or an oval, 
with openings from opposite sides fo give convenient 
access fo a centre table, which can be used for supplies or 
as a difling table. 
Drawers and cupboards fo hold the neeessary utensils 
and supplies should be provided in the tables fr»r em.h 
pupil. Provisi«»l llmy al.«» bc nmde Uldcr thc table t«q) 



14 HOUSEHOLD ]MANAGEMENT 

f,,r desk boards, which may ]»e pulled out when notes are 
written, in order fo allow the pupils to sit comfortably in 
front of the cupboards. The table t.p sholfld be of hard 
wood or some non-absorbent matcrial, jointed in narrow 
strips in order fo prevent warping. Part of this must be 
protected l,v a metal or glass strip t,, which tu set the 
i,.liridual stoes or hot dishes. 

[  

Contents of a table cupboard equipped for two pupils 

A working drawing and design «,f the tahlc. u.ed in 
the Normal Schools mav be obtained fronl the Department 
(,f Education, Toronto. 

SEATS 

The seats mav be swing seats, stools, or ehairs. The 
swing seats are noiseless ad easily put out of the way, but 
are uncomfortable and unsteady, so that the pupils are 
inelined fo prop them.elve. l,y plaeing their elbows on the 
tahh., q'hc st,«,l» a,d «hairs are n+,iv and eeupy a great 



EQUIPMENT: DRAWERS 15 



16 HOUSEHOLD IIANAGEMENT 

,h.a] ,f r,«,nl, but |n. ]airer are restfu! ara| (-»ndm-ive to 
the correct position of file pupi]s, t]le importance of which 
canm,t be oxer-estilnatcd. Thc former arc inexpensive, if 
ruade with a plain, wç,,den te,p. B<,th sh«uld adroit of" 
b«.in pusbed under tle lai,le, and f,,r lhis reas«,n lhe 
«-hairs shou]d ]mve folding backs. The h.zs sh«,u]d },e 
fipped with rubber in order fo minimizc fle noise. 

A class towel rack 

RACKS 

Towel raeks shou]d be placed near the sinks and, if 
possible, should allow space f,-,r hanginff thc towel« with,ut 
f,,]ding. In some tal,]e a towc] ra<.k mav 1,c a/tacbed 
one of the side.. 



CLASS CUPBOARD 17 

SINKS 
A sink af each corner of the room saves much rime and 
im.onveniences in the work. Each of these should I,e pro- 
vidcd with hot and «ohl water. They luay be ruade of 
poreelain or of enamelled iron. 

A class gas range, showing high ovens 

CLASS CUPBOARD 

A large cla.s euphoard in two sections, having glass 
d«»ors in the upper part to show the elass china and glass, 
should be placed where if will be most convenient and add 
fo the attractiveness of the rob,m. This cupboard will hold 
file dira,er set and extra dishes and utensils, as well as the 
linen and some staple food supplies. A refrigerator is 
desirable f»r sut'h foods as butter, eggs, meat, etc. 



1_ I-tOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 



STOVES 19 

STOVES 

The stores provided will del»end «,n the fuel that is 
available in thê leighl»ourhood. W«×»d is still in use in 
some rural sêctions, while coal is the ordinary fuel in 
small towns and villages. Where either of these fuels is 
commonly used, there shouhl I,e two ranges. One should 

Individual table stoves 

(a) a gas store 

(b) an electric stove 

(c) a blue-flame kerosene stove (d) an ordinary kerosene stove 

be for coal or wood, to teach the use of the home fuel, and 
the other an oil, gas, or electric store, to demon.trate the 
rime and labour saxed the housekeeper by the use of one 
of these. If possible, the stores should have high ovens, 
fo obviate the necessity of stooping. A section of glass in 



20 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

the oven door is a great convenienve, as if a]10,ws the con- 
tcnts ,,f the oven tobe easilv watehcd. 
F»r indiidual work snm]l table stocs are required. 
Thcsc m; 0" I,e SulTlicd with oil, alcohol, gas, or c]ectriciiy, 
as mav bc mot readilv ol,tained. Thcse stores may 1,e 
arranged so that lhey (.n be swung from the table wben 
n,»t in use. In this way more room is pr.vided for work, 
and the table is more easilv clcaned. The tops of the 
st»ves should be wide and fiat, so lhat cooking dishes will 
l,,t easilv upsct. 
A fireless («».er, th,uh n,t r('allv necessary, is most 
llc]pful. Whcre fumls are ]a«.kilg ouc nlay be ruade by thc 
pupils af small cxpense. A barrel, wooden box, or large 
pail mav be fillcd wilh hay [)r cx('e]si-r, and small, covered, 
grallite lmi]s nlaV bc used t,» v,»ltain the food. 

P, LAt" K-B-L't IIDS 

The black-b,,ards shouid be of s|ate or glass, and as 
larze as the «ize ,»f thc room allows. Thc windows and 
dehors .¢houl,1 be so plaeed that there will be unhroken 
stretvhês of wall for this purpose. Part of the black-board 
should be providcd with a sliding board which, when re- 
quired, tan bc drawn t conceal what is writtcn. A 
scparate black-board f,,r «'urrent priccs of common food 
material. i. an excellent idea. The responsibility of keep- 
ing these prices correct should be giveu to the pupils. 

I LLU,TIIATIVE MATEIII.L 

A cabinet, or display case, for illustrative material, i 
of great edueationa] value and, fo the pupi]s, i. one of the 
mo.¢t attractive features of the room. The following lst 
of .pecimens is suggestive for this: 



ILLUSTRATIVE MATERIAL 21 

1. Standard china, such as ('rown Derby, Wedcw[»od, 
Limoges, Dresden, Beleek, etc. 
2. Standard carpet, such as Axminster, Wilton, Brussels, 
Tapestry 
3. Woods used for furniture and building 

A display cbinet--canned fruit 

4. Food materials in various stages of preparation, such 
as sugar, spices, cereals, tea, coffee, cocoa 
5. Fruit canned by the pupils 
6. Designs for wall-paper, linoleum, dishes, etc., ruade by 
the pupils. 
3 I-L t. o 



22 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Other illn.trative material in the form of charts show- 
ing the comparative alues of the common foods, or illus- 
trating cuts of meat or different kinds of vegetables and 
fish, will be found to aid greatly in making the teaching 
effective. There are few of these to be obtained, but 
home-marie ones may be prepared from' cuts in bulletins 
and magazines, Pictures il[u.,trating the production and 
manufacture of food mav also be mounted and used. 

BOOK-CASE 
Book sbelves should be providcd, where a small 
library of books bearing on tbe vari«,u. phases of the sub- 
ject may be kept, tozther with tbe Govcrnment Bulletin» 
and some u'ell-cbosen periodi«.als and magazines. These 
mav be selected from the ('alaloge of Books which has 
been prepared by the Department of Education. 

UTENSILS 

In regard to tbe selection of small articles required. 
such as dishes ami utensils of various kinds, the greatest 
eare should be exercised: This part of the equipment tan 
be exactlv duplicated by the pupils in their homeso and 
in this wav mav be of educational value to the community. 
The cooking and serving dihes should combine quality, 
atility, and beauty. 
It is hot economv fo buv cbeap utensils. As far as 
possible, thev shouhl be chosen with smooth, curved sur- 
faces, as seams and an.les allow lodging places for food 
and make the c]eanin diflïcu]t. 
Eerytbin should be of Zood quality, the latest of ifs 
kind that has been approve«l, and. at the saine rime. have 
a sbape and colour that is artistic. 



EQUIPMENT 23 

If is wise te buy frein stock which ean be duplieated if 
breakages occur, se that the equipment may be kept 
uniform. For individual work the utensils should net be 
too large. 
Coloured granite ware is best for most of the cooking 
dishes. Where tin is necessary, if should be of a good 
quality. Crockery is desirable for seine bor]s, jars, and 
serving dishes. ,qpoons and serving forks should be of 
Neva,la silver, and knives of the best steel rith well-made 
wooden handles. 
The cost of this part of the equipment and the hUm- 
ber of articles purchased must of course depend o the 
funds available. The followinff list is intende,l te give 
what is really desirable in a specially equipped room, at 
prices which are a fair averaffe. 

EQUIPMENT 
FOR TWENTY-FOUR PUPILS 

I. CLASS TABLE 
l. UTESSII, DRAWER: 
24 plates, enamel, 9 inch ....................... $0.70 

14 '" white crockery, 7 inch ................ 80 
24 bowls white crockery, 7 inch ................ 3.60 
24 ...... 5½ inch ............... 1.20 
24 enamel bowls, 6 inch ....................... 2.40 
24 popover cups ............................... 1.80 
24 bakers, crockery (oval} ..................... 1.20 
24 platters, " (small) ................... 1.50 
24 sieves (wire bowl) .......................... 1.30 
24 spoons, wooden .............................. 1.92 
24 spatulas, wire handle ....................... 7.20 
24 kntves, paring .............................. 2.00 
24 forks, Nevada silver ........................ 2.50 



24 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

24 spoons, table, Nevada silver ................ $2.50 
48 spoons, tea, " - . ................ 1.20 
24 cups, measuring, tin ........................ 2.40 
2. SUPPLI" DRAWER: 
12 boxes (for flour}, tin ........................ 10.00 
12 " tfor sugar), " . ....................... 7.50 
12 cheeso jars (for sait) ........................ 68 
24 shakers, glass ............................... 2.40 
24 bread tins .................................. 4.32 
24 biscuit cutters ............................... 72 
13 safety match-box holders .................... 1.62 
. SUPPLY CUPBOARD: 
12 double boilers .............................. 5.76 
24 stew paris, tin cover, wooden knob .......... 4.56 
24 frying-pans ................................. 1.20 
24 saucepans ................................... 2.16 
12 knife-boards ................................ 1.80 
12 meat boards ................................ 3.00 
6 scrub basins ................................ 1.50 
12 dish paris .................................. 6.00 
12 rinsing paris ................................ 3.00 
12 draining paris ............................... 3.00 
6 tea-kettles ................................. 3.00 
12 scrub-brushes ................................ 2.(0 
12 vegetable brushes ............................ 30 
12 soap dishes .................................. 75 
12 garbage crocks ............................... 96 
24 asbestos mats ............................... 1.10 

II. SINK AND WALLS 

1 garbage pail, galvanized tron ................ 1.00 
1 waste-1)aper basket, willow (large) ........... 75 
1 soap dish .................................... 11 
1 brush, hand ................................. 03 
1 brush, scrub ................................. 17 
2 basins, hand, enamel ......................... 40 



EQUIPMENT 25 

2 basins, scrub, enamel ......................... 50 
.70 
1 dish pari .................................... 
1 crock for washing soda ...................... 30 
2 towel racks ................................ 1.50 
1 clock ....................................... 5.50 
12 tablets for housekeeping rules ................. 70 

III. GENERAL ('['PBOARI EQUIPMF.NT 

2 kettles, granlte ............................. 1.50 
1 tea-kettle, granite ............................ 85 
1 saucepan .................................... 28 
1 saucepan ..................................... 35 
5 covers, tin ................................... 25 
1 pie pari ...................................... 10 
1 coffee-pot ................................. 32 
6 saucepans, 1 qt. size, white enamel ........... 1.08 
1 double boiler ................................ 59 
6 covers, tin .................................. 30 
1 soup ladle, enamel ........................... 09 
2 pudding dishes, white enamel ................. 40 
12 strainers and mashers ....................... 1.80 
1 kneading pari ................................ 85 
3 steamers ..................................... 67 
10 graters ..................................... 1.00 
2 vegetable baskets ............................. 30 
6 potato mashers .............................. 4R 
4 muffin pans .................................. 60 
24 patty-pans ................................... 20 
12 Dover egg beaters .......................... 1.20 
1 spice box .................................... 50 
I japanned tray ................................ 25 
24 wire toasters ................................ 2.40 
1 egg spade .................................... 15 
1 scale ....................................... 3.10 
1 freezer ..................................... 3.00 
1 cast-iron frying-pan ........................... 40 
1 dripping pari ................................. 25 
2 roasting paris ................................ 60 



26 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

quart measure, granite ....................... 
pint measure, " . ..................... 
funnel, tin .................................. 
baking sheets 7" x 17" . ...................... 
.... 10" x 10" . ................... 
cups and saucers ........................... 
tumblers ............................ 
platters ..................................... 
plates ...................................... 
pitchers, 15 pt ............................... 
brown bowls, 2 qt ........................... 
brown bowls ................................ 
nest of mixing bowls ..................... 
glass measuring cups ....................... 
glass lemon reamers ........................ 
tea-pots (pint) .............................. 
covered crock ............................... 
doz. 1 qt. fruit jars .......................... 
" 2 qt. " °' , ......................... 
" 1 pt. " " , ......................... 
meat chopper .............................. 
bread knife ................................. 
bread board ................................ 
knives, French ............................. 
spoons, granite .............................. 
fork, large wooden handle .................. 
can openers ................................ 
corkscrew .................................. 
bunch skewers ............................ 
brush, pastry ............................... 
knife sharpener ............................. 
graters, nutmeg ............................. 
box toothptcks .............................. 
pad tissue paper ............................ 
scissors ..................................... 
doz. jelly glasses ............................ 
cream and sugar ............................ 

60 
.45 
.05 
.92 
1.08 
1.30 
1.50 
.36 
.34 
1.00 
.75 
.25 
1.00 
.60 
.60 
1.50 
.25 
.65 
.75 
.55 
3.10 
.25 
.25 
.$5 
.21 
.15 
.20 
.25 
.15 
.05 
.25 
.09 
.05 
.05 
1.25 
.35 
.30 



EQUIPMENT 27 

24 rolling-pins ................................. 
1 butter spado .............................. 
1 file and catch ............................... 
3 doz. test-tubes .............................. 
1 " thermometers (Dairy) .................. 
2 lamp chimneys .............................. 
1 bel1 ......................................... 

3.00 
.15 
.65 
.90 
2.50 
.30 
.40 

IV. KIT{'IIEN" LIN'EN 

36 yards towelling (3 doz. dish towels) .......... 
" (4 doz. wash eloths) ........ 
check towelling (3 doz. dish eloths)... 
towelling ........................... 
°' (6 meat cloths) ............ 
flanneletto (oven cloths) .............. 
cheesec]oth ....................... 
denim (stovo apron) .................. 
flanneletto (for polishing silver) ....... 
chamois ................................. 

5.40 
2.40 
1.60 
.75 
.60 
.23 
".60 
.27 
.20 
.25 

V. CLEANING CUPBOARD 

1 stovo apron ................................. 
1 stovo brush ................................. 
1 dauber ..................................... 
3 whisk brooms .............................. 
1 dust-Pan .................................... 
I pair stovo mitts ............................ 
1 broom ............................... 

.27 
.25 
.10 
.45 
.20 
.30 
.45 

VI. L.iUNDRY EQ['IP.IES,'T 

14 pony washboards ............................ 
6 doz. clothes-pins ............................. 
1 clothes-line ................................. 

1.75 
.I0 
.25 



2 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

VII. DINING-ROOM EQUIPIENT 
China and Glass: 
1 flower vase .................................. 25 
1 dinner set, Limoges china ................... 15.50 
1 doz. water glasses ........................... 80 
1 glass fruit set .............................. 1.50 

2. Silver and Steel: 
2 doz. teaspoons .............................. 4.20 
1 " dessert spoons ........................ 4.00 
.'_. " tablespoons ........................ 1.15 
1 " dessert knives ........................ 4.50 
1 " dessert forks ......................... 4.50 
1 " dinner knives ........................ 4.50 
1 " dinner forks .......................... 4.50 
1 carving set ............................. 2.00 
1 butter pick .................................. 20 

3. Linen, etc. : 
1 silence cloth ............................... 1.50 
1 4 yd. table-c|oth ............................ 5.40 
1 doz. napkins ................................ 
1 centre-piece .................................. 40 
2 doylies ...................................... 50 
2 tray cloths ................................. 1.00 

VIII. 
" First Aid " cabinet ........................ 10.00 
tire blanket ................................. 2.00 

EQUIPMENT FOR ORDINARY CLASS-ROOMS 

In some schools it is impossible fo set aside a special 
room for Household Management wt)rk, and the ordinary 
«.lass-ro(.m is ll that is availab]e. In su«h cases the equip- 
meurt must be a movab]e one, and gas stores and p]umb- 



EQUIPMENT 29 

ing are impossible. Table tol)S may he placed Oll trestles 
or laid across the ordinary desks, and oil or alcohol lamps 
must be used. Thcsc and the nece..ary utensils may be 
kept in a cupboard in the room. 
With certain restriction.% the Dcpartlnent of Education 
assists in equipping special rooms in villages and rural 
districts and also il, naintailfing ill.truction in this 
subject. 
The classes in these schools are usually smaller, so that 

:Modifled equipment for rural schools 

an outfit suitable for individual work with a class of 
weh'e wi]] enera]]y suffice. The f]]own, sugesed by 
the Macdonald Institute, Guelph, is a good basis and may 
be modified as desired: 

2 bowls, brown ..... $0.85 
12 bread tins ......... 95 
12 tea cups and saucers 1.25 
12 tin measuring cups. 1.25 
12 egg beaters ......... 30 
12 forks ............... 40 

12 case knives ....... 1.25 
12 paring knives ..... 1.25 
12 plates ............. 85 
12 saucepans ......... 1.68 
I2 tablespoons ........ 50 
24 teaspoons .......... 40 



30 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

12 wooden spoons ..... 60 
12 stew pans ........ 2.40 
12 strainers .......... 65 
2 trays .............. 80 
1 bowl, yellow ....... 25 
1 .... • ...... 35 
1 .... • ...... 45 
3 scissors ......... 1.50 
5 trestle tables ...... 20.55 
6 frying-pans ........ 90 
3 tes strainers ....... 15 
3 match-box stands.. .24 
1 emery knife ........ 20 
3 soap dishes ........ 25 
12 pepper shakers ... 1.50 
12 salt shakers ...... 1.50 

1 bell ............... 50 
4 lemon reamers .... 40 
6 stores, kerosene... 6.00 
12 plates, dinner ..... 1.25 
6 plates, soup ........ 60 
4 jugs ............... 60 
1 jug ................ 45 
1 butcher knife ...... 30 
1 French knife ...... 60 
2 spatulas ........... g0 
6 teaspoons .......... 10 
3 tableCpoons ........ 13 

.20 
4 brushes ........... 
2 store mitts ........ 50 
4 asbestos mats ...... 20 
1 corkscrew .......... 25 
4 egg beaters ........ 60 
4 wash basins ....... 92 
3 draining paris ..... 69 
4 dish paris ......... 2.00 
6 broilers ............ 48 
3 cake tins ........... 35 
4 graters ............ 40 
3 strainers .......... 75 
24 patty paris ......... 20 
2 tin dippers ........ 40 
2 fibre pails .......... 70 
1 colander ........... 35 
1 pail, enamel ....... 70 
1 pari, enamel ....... 18 
3 tea-kettles ........ 2.70 
1 saucepan .......... 30 
1 saucepan ........... 25 
1 saucepan ........... 23 
1 saucepan ........... 30 
1 double boiler ...... g5 
1 kettle, covered ..... 60 
*I store to burn coal 
or wood ......... 30.00 

Total .......... $100.05 

*The above may be replaced by a twenty-dollar wood store 
or a ten-dollar, two burner, coal-il store. 

PACKING-BOX EQUIPMENT 

When even the expense of the modified equipment is 
too great, the ingenuity of the teacher and the pupils mav 
be used fo provide a '" packing-box" equipment suitable 
for six pupils. The outlav for this will varv according to 



PACKING-BOX EQUIPMENT 31 

what is provided, but it can in no case be large. The fol- 
lowing equipment used by the Department of Domestic 
Science, Teachers' College, Columbia University, will be 
suggestive: 

Packing-box equipment 

FOR CLASS 

bread boards ..... $0.] 5 
rolling-pin ......... 05 
baking-powder can 
tops, for cookie 
cutters ............ 
flour sifter ........ 10 
large frying-pan ..... 25 
double boiler ....... 50 
quart kettlo ....... 25 
tea-kettle .......... 50 
broiler ............. 20 
garbago can ....... 25 
pitchers ........... 25 
apple corers ....... 10 
chopping knife ..... 10 
chopping bowl ...... 05 

6 muffin tins ......... 
2 layer-cake tins ..... 10 
3 dish pans .......... 45 
3 rinsing paris ....... 30 
1 strainer ............ 05 
6 china plates ........ 30 
3 mixing bowls ...... 30 
6 sauce dishes ....... 15 
6 cups and saucers .. .30 
1 coffee-pot .......... 25 
1 tea-pot ............. 10 
3 bread paris ........ 15 
6 quart jars ......... 30 
3 wooden paris with 
covers ........... 30 
6 dish towels ........ 48 



32 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

3 dish cloths ......... 15 
3 hand towels ....... 15 
1 broom ............. 30 
1 dust-13an ........... 08 
1 scrubbing-brush .... 10 
I scrubbing pail ..... 20 
1 Dorer egg beater.. .09 
1 pepper shaker ...... 05 
1 salt shaker ........ 05 
1 baking dish ........ 10 

1 bread knifo ........ 25 
1 corkscrew .......... 10 

Total ............ $8.02 
1 packing-box table.. 1.00 
1 packing-box cup- 
board ............ 50 

Large blue-flame vil 
store ........... $10.00 

INDIVIDU.L EQUIPME\'T FOI SIX IUPILS 

1 white bowl, 1 qt... $0.07 

measuring cup ..... 05 
granite plate ....... 10 
saucepan ........... 05 
tin cover ........... 05 
steel fork ......... 10 
steel knife ......... 10 

I tablespoon ......... 03 
2 teaspoons .......... 05 

Total ............ 

1 oil stove .......... 
1 asbestes mat ...... 

.6O 
.75 
.05 



CHAPTER II 

SUGGESTIONS FOR CLASS MANAGEMENT 

TEACIIERS" PItEPAIL**TION 
I' o subject is eareful planning «,f the details of the 
less-n more important than in ll,,useh«,l,1 Management. 
The definite length of thc peri««l alh,wcd in the se.ho,,1 
pr.zramme f«,r this work makes et.out,mv «,f time al,s«,lutelv 
necessary. The cooking processes cannot be hurried, and 
unless there is in the tcacher's mind a well-arranged plan 
f«,r tl,e use «,f the time. a l,art ,,f thc less,,n is al,t to I,e 
hastily and carelesslv chine. Then, too. in the limite,1 
spaee of one roc,m, a numher of pe-l,le cam,«»t work witl,- 
out confusion unless there is svstem. 
The pupils enjoy a wcll-regulated les.«,n and their co- 
operation is gaine& whilc, through the l,,,,,r results «,f a 
less«,n indiffcrentlv ],lanned, thcv lose self-c«,nfidcnce and 
the sense of responsil,ility. 

NUMBER IN TI[E ('LA.S 
As a llouseh«,ld ManaT,ncnt «.lass is c,ue that ¢-alls f,,r 
i,dividual supervision, thc number sh«,uld n«,t ex«.ced 
twenty-f«,nr, and a smallcr (.lass cnsurcs me,re th«,r, uzh 
supervision «,n t],c l,art «,f thc tea«'her. Neatncss. thor«,ugh- 
ness, and a«curacv arc imp,,rtant fa,'t,,rs in the work of 
each lesson, an,I the number of pupils sh.uhl hot be so 
large that a lack of these will pass unnoticed. 

UNIFORMS, ETC. 
The uniform consists of a large, plain, white apron 
with a bib lare enough fo pr«,tect the dres., a pair of 
slecvelets, a hohler, a small towel f,,r perso,ml use, and a 
3 



34 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

white muslin cal» t» confine the hair. (See Frmtispiece.) 
Each pupil wi]l als« require a n,,te-I,,>ok and pencil for 
-l,ss, and a n,»tc-l,»ok to bc used at home f.r re-copying 
the elass work in ink. These books should be neatly 
writtcn and kept for refcrcnce, and should be regularly 
cxamined and marked bv the tem.her for c»rrection by 
/ho l,upils. 
The pupils should be encouraged fo be clean and neat 
in al»pearan('e. Thev slmuld be expeeted fo have tidy hair, 
elean hamls and naiN, and neat uniforms. It is a good 
]dan rot each pupil te, bave tw«, set. of uniforms..o that 
when «me is in the wash the ,ther will be readv to use. It 
mav l,e wise to make a rule that thc pupils without 
uniforms will hot be all,wed to work, but such a rule must 
be judieiou.qy enf»reed, a. in s»me cases it might result in 
much h,s.¢ of rime. There shonld be lockers «,r »ther proper 
I, rovisim pr, vided af the sch«,,1 for keepin eaeh uniform 
Sel,aratel.v. Pasteh«,ard b«,xe. mav l»e used fi»r this pur- 
pose, when no sueh provision is ruade. 

DISCIPLINE 
The pupils should be trained to enter and leave the 
room in the saine «,rder as in their other ,'la».¢es. Each 
pul»il should have a definite workmg place and should hot 
he alhm'ed t, " " " . 
"" vst others durin the ('lass.  
While at work. it i: wise to allow the pnpils as much 
freedom in talkinz and movement a. possible, so as to 
portray the home lire. Thev shouhl be tauzht, however, 
that when their c,nduct interfere.¢ with tho or, lor of the 
room or the cmnforts and rights .f .ther., thcv m>t 
suppress their int.linations, lurin.,.., the rime of teaching 
there must be perfeet quiet and attmjti«,n. Marks are 
sometimes given to secure lmnctuality and yo«,d work, 



DIVISION OF PERIODS 35 

]rut the ]»est wav fo have both is fo try t- make each recto- 
ber of the class interested and happy in her work. 
DIVISION OF TllE PERIOD. 
The rime given fo a practical less«,n is usually one and 
a hall hours. This must include both the theoretical and 
the practical work. In dividing the period, it is dittïcult 
fo sav ll.w much rime ,llouhl be given to ea«h of these, but, 
broadlv speaking, the the,reti«al part may o«.cupy one thir,1 
of the rime. The rime f.r dish washing and clcaning will 
be included in the rime allowanr.e f«»r 1)ractical work. 
These dutie.a should require le.s finie as the clas. adrances 
in the work. 
Notes shonhl Ire et»pied ai the re.st convenient time, 
usuallv while the fo(,d is eo.king. Sitting fo write notes 
will afford an opportunity f.r festin.._, after anv praetieal 
work. If printed eards are used. mueh of the note-taking 
is obviated. A saml)le tard is given bel,)w. 

]IOUSEIIOLD MANA(;EMENT 

JUNIOR FIrURTI[ CARD 
VEGETABLE WATER SAUCE 
1 c. veg. water 2 tbsp. butter 
2 tbsp. flour pepper  tsp. salt 
1. Put the vegetable water over a gentle heat. 
2. lIix the flour with a little cold water until smooth and 
thick as cream. 
3. When the vegetable water is steaming hot, gradually stir 
the flour paste into it and keep stirring until It thickens and 
boils. 
4. Add the butter, salt, and pepper. 
5. Pour the sauce over the hot vegetable. 



36 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

A.SSIONMEST OF WOIIK 
For practical work there are two plans in general use 
--in,lividual and group work. In indivi,lual work, each 
l»ttpil performs ail the processe, handling small quantifies 
of material. In zroup work, the pupils work in groups on 
one dish, eaeh sharing the duties. 
By the first meth,,d, thc l»upil has no t-han«.e t« eh.al 
with quantitics larCe enough for family purposes, and the 
small amouut d,»es hot give adequate practiee in manipula- 
tion, though it does give individual responsibility in every 
detail. By the second method, normal quantities are used, 
but a pupil never has entire reponsibility throughout the 
procsses. 
The eost of upplies is often aeeountable for group 
work, but lack of utensils or oven room mav make if a 
ecessitv. lt some lessons, individual work with normal 
quantifies mav I,e ohtained 1,y alh,win the pupils t,, bring 
the main ingredients from home: for example, fruit for a 
canning lesson. The finished prouct is then the property 
of the pupil who has ruade if. 
The clea»ing whieh ahvavs follows the use of the 
equipment is preferably donc lu roups. For instance, if 
there aï,. r(,nps of fours, mmber one eau, during a lestera, 
wash ail dishes ued hv the four, numher two ean wipe 
the dishes, mtmler three t'an ,.lean the table used by the 
group, and number four tan clean the sink. During the 
next lesson number wo is dish washer, and nnmber three 
dish wipcr, and so on, util, in four lessons, each pupil 
has had practice in four kinds of household work and bas 
alto been .ÂŒEiven an idea of the inter-dependenoe of familv 
life and interests. The saine nun0»ers should be kept 
during the terre, as this affords an easv wav of definitely 
designating the pupils for certain duties. 



PRACTICE WORK AT HOME 37 

SUPPLIES 
The supplies for a lesson may be put on a centre table, 
or smaller amounts may be placed on the workin tables 
in front of the groups. If the class is large, thc latter 
plan is better, especially where measurements are neces.-:ary, 
as if saves rime and confusion. Standard food supplies, 
.uch as sait, pcpper, sugar, and flour nmv be kcpt in a 
drawer of the work-table of ea«-h pupil. (Ste paze 15.) 
Every menlber of the class should be famiiiar with the 
eontents of the elass pantry, eupboard., and drawers, so 
that she ean get or put away utensils and materials with- 
out the help of the teaeher. 
If breakages o«.cur through carelessness, the utensils 
should be replaeed at the expense of the offender. This is 
hot only a deserved pulli,hment, but it always en.ures a 
full equipment. 

PRACTICE WORK AT IIOME 
As a lesson in llou.¢ehold Management cornes but once 
a week, mueh is gained bv having the work reviewed by 
praetiee at home. To encourage this, in some sehools a 
" praetiee sheet" is posted, on which the work donc 
eaeh pupil, between lessons, is reeorded. There is a 
danger of the younger pupils attempting work that is too 
diffieult, which will end in poor results and diseourage- 
ment. To avoid this, with pupils in the Third Form. it 
may be wise fo limit their praetiee in eookerv fo a review 
of the work dm,e in elass. 
The home praetiee work mav be taken af the beginning 
of a lesson or durinz the rime the food is eooking. It mav 
be quiekly aseertained hy the pupils rising in ortier and 
stating simply the name of the duty thev have donc or 
the dish they have ruade uldess they have had poor results, 



38 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

when the nature of these .llould be told. If there bave been 
failures, the pupils shouhl, if possible, give reasons for 
the.e and sugge.t meaus of avoidillg tht«n iii future. 

GENERAL SUGGESTIONS 
1. The teacher should endeaour to plan lessons which 
will be definitelv related to the home lires of the pupiis. 
What is useful for Olle class mav not be useful for another. 
The connection bet'cen the lessons and the home should 
be very real. It is also important to have a sequence in 
the lessons. 
2. Great (.are should be exerci.ed in criticising any of 
the home method. that are suggested bv the pupils. A 
girl'. faith in lier mother should n,»t be lessened. 
3. The work should be taken up in a ver'¢ simple man- 
ner; scientific presentation should be left for the high 
school. 
4. Economv should be empbasized in all home duties; 
time, labour, and money sbould be used to give the best 
possible returns. Wholesome substitutes for expensi'e 
foods and attractive preparatioll and serving of lcft-over 
foods should be encouraged. 
5. Too much vigilance cannot be exercised during the 
first year of practi(.al work. wben habits are beinzformed. 
It is much easier to form habits than to break awav from 
them. 
6. While nothin less than the best work sbould be 
accepted from the pupils, it requires mueh discernment to 
know when fault should be found, i order to avoid saying 
or doing alything that wouhl t.liscouraffe them. 
7. As II«useliold Management is a manual subject,/he 
teacher is advised, as far as possible, not fo spend rime 



SPECIAL SUGGESTIONS 39 

in talking about the work, but to have the class spend their 
timc in doing the work. 

SUGG,ESTIONS FOR SCH00LS WITH LIMITED, 
OR NO EQUIPMENT 
In schools where thc ordinary (.lass-ro,m must be uscd 
for all subjeets, there are unusual diffieulties in teaehing 
Household Management. For sueh sehools, two nmdified 
equipmênts are outlined. 
Sinee su«h elass-r««»ms rcquire spccial arrangement for 
praetieal lessons in this subject, if would be well fo take 
this work in the afternoon, so that part of the noon hour 
may be taken for preparation, l'upils who have earned the 
right fo responsibility may be appointed in turn to assist 
iu this duty. 
In rural schools, the afternoon rccess migbt be taken 
from 2.15 fo 2.30 aud, during this rime, tables, stores, aud 
supplies may be plaeed, su as fo be readv f«»r the lesson fo 
folloç in the remaining hour and a hall. 
For pupils who are hot in tbc l[ouseh.ld Management 
class, definite work shouhl l»c planned. Thcv may oecupy 
themselves with nmnual training, sewing, art work, map- 
drawing, composition, etc. In summer, school gardening 
mav be doue. 
Since the end of the weck, in many schools, is chosen 
for a break in the usual routine, Friday afternoon secms 
a suitable rime for llousehold Mana,.-ement lessons. 
Vnder su«b limited «mditims. it will l,e neeessarv to 
group the larger pupils into oue elass for praetieal work, 
and if may I»t, neeessarv for the pupils fo take turns in 
working, lu some cases, the teaeher must dcmonstrate 
what the elass may praetise af home. 



40 HOUSEHOLD IIANAGEIMENT 

It will be imp,»ssiblc, in such se.ho»ris, t,» (.,,ver the pre- 
st.rihcd w,wk. From thc t,q»it.s sug7estcd in thc ('ourse of 
Studv ('ach teachcr mav arrange a l»rogrannle I»v selecting 
what is me,st useful to the pupils and what is possible in 
the school. 
Een il s«.h«»,ls whi«.h have no cquipmeut, nut.l of thc 
theorv of H,,usehold Management tan be taught and some 
experiments mav he perf,rmcd. On Fridav afternoons a 
regular lwri,,d lnaV ],e devoted to this subject, wheu the 
inenious tea«h«.r wi]l find wavs and means of teaching 
many useful lessons. 

The following will be su,..,.,..,cstive as suitab]e for lessons 
under such («,nditions" 
1. Anv of the lessons prescrihed in t]e ('ourse of Study 
for Form III. Junior. 
2. Mêasurin,,.,.--Table of mea.ures used in cookery, 
methods of measuring, equivlent measures and 
weights «,f standard f,,,,ls. 
3. Clêaning.--Principles, methods, agents. 
4. Water.--U.es in the h,me. apl,earanee under hêat, 
highest temperaturê, wavs of using cooking water. 
5.. Cooking.--Rcasons for eooking, kinds of heat used, 
common mcth«,ds of coudu«-tin hcat t,, food, com- 
paris«,n «,f methods of cooking as to rime rêquired 
and effecf of heat on food. 
NoTE.'--An alcohol stove, saucepan, and thermometer are 
necessary or this lesson. 

6. The kitchen fire.--Experiments fo show neeessities of 
a tire. construction of a practical cooking store. 
7. Fo«,d.--Uses. kind.,, c«,mm«,n s«,urces. 



SPE('IAL SUGGESTIONS 41 

8. Preservati,,,, ,,f f,,,,,I.--('ause ,,f ,I,.,'ay. mcth.,Is 
l,rescrxation, al,l,licati,,n ,,f mcthods to well-know,, 
foods. 
9. Yeast.Description, necessary conditions, sources, 
use. 
NoT.A few test-tubes and a saucepan are necessary for 
this lesso. 
10. The table.--Laying a table, serving at table, table 
manners. 
ll. ('arc ,,f a bcd-r«,,m.Making thc bcd, ventilating, 
sweeping, and dusting the room. 
12. Sanitatiç, n.Necessitv f,,r sanitation, household 
methods. 
13. Laundrv work.Necessarv materia]., processes. 
14. IIome-nursing.The idal sick-room, «-are of the 
patient's bed, and diet. 



CIIAPTEh' III 

FORM III : ,IUNI(tR (IRADE 

TflE PUPILS ,,f F.rm III. Junior. are generally too small 
te, use the tables and stores l,rovidcd f«,r the .ther classes 
and t-o young t,, be intrustcd with rires, hot water, etc. ; 
but thev mav ],e taught thc simldcr facts »f Ih»uschold 
Manag«.ment I,v thc spccial tea«'hcr of the subject, or by 
the regular t,,a«'her in «.rr(,lation with the -ther subects. 
In either ('a»e a Sl«'cia] room is hot necessary. 
If thc ];ttcr plan I,e ad«,pted, the f.ll.wing correla- 
tions are suggested : 

CORRELATIONS 

Arithmetic.--l. P, ills «)f Imusehold supplies, such as 
furniture, fuel. meat. gro«-eries, bed and tahle linea, 
material for elothinz. This will tea«.h the current prices 
as well as the usual quantities purchased. 
2. Makin.,.., out the ,laily, weckly, or monthly supply 
and cost of anv «,rie item of f,,o,], I,ein z given the number 
in the family and thc am.unt used by eaeh per dav. 
E.,'ample: (trie I.af «..sts 6c. and cuts int,, 1, slices, 
Find the cost «,f bread for two days f«»r a family of six, if 
eaeh person uses 1.x_, sliees al «,rie meal. 
3. hlakinz out the total wcek|v or monthly expenses 
,)f a household, iven the items ,,f meat, roeeries, fuel, 
gas, etc. This brings up thc question of the cost of living. 
4. Making out the total cost of a cake. a loaf of bread, 
a jar of fruit, or a number «,f sandwiches, given the cost 
42 



CORRELATIONS 43 

of the main materials and fuel used. l'.repart the home 
cost with the cost at a store. This nay he used fo teacli 

economy. 

Geography.--l. The sources of .ur watcr supplv. 
2. The geographical sources «,f our «wdinarv household 
materials, their shipping centres, the routes bv which thev 
reach us, and the means of transportation. 
Ex»lple.: Fucls, c«.nlmol minera]s used in bui]ding 
and furnishing; tituber for floors and furniure; manu- 
facturcd goods, such as e»ttOll, linen, carpets, china; 
domestic an«] f»reign fruits: ct»nlnl»n groceries, such as 
sait, sugar, tea, coffee, eoeoa, spices, rice, cereals, and flour. 
3. The preparation of our eomnloll h6usehold 
modifies. 
Example.¢: Cotton. linen, china, paper, sugar, tea, 
coffee, cereals, flour. 
4. Thc h.usehold pro»dru.fs that are exported. 

Nature Study.--1. The parts [,f plants used as food. 
2. The natural sources of out c«,mmon foods, such as 
cornstarch, fl.ur, breakfast ccreals, tca, c[»ffee, co(.oa, sugar, 
salt, cheese, butter. 
3. Tbe sources of common household substances, such 
as coal-oil, gasolene, paraffin, turpeutine, washing soda, 
whiting, bathbrick, soap. 
4. The forms of water, as ice, steam. 
5. The composition and impurities of the air. 
6. The ordinary woods used in house building and 
furnishing. 



4 4 I IOUSEHOLD MANAGEM ENT 

IIygien[,.--The ,Jece.:ily for thc folh»wing: 
1. Frcsh air in t}e h,me af all rimes--in living rooms 
and slecping rooms 
?. ;ood food and plenty rd sleep 
3. Cleanlinc:s of lhe 
4. (leanhne.-.- iii preparing 
5. f'leanliness in lhe home and surrrmn[lings. 
Pin-sic.al Training--l. The value of exercise gained by 
pcrforming hou:ehold dufies. 
9.. Thc importance of correct positions in performing 
home dufie.q, such as dish washing, scwing, etc. 
3. The value of oonvenienees te, save stel)S. 
(',mposition.Topics selectcd from household ma- 
terials and activities. 
E.ramlde.ç: Food materials, (.h,ansin azcnts, planning 
a convenient kitchen (,r 1,ath-room, sweeping day, baking 
day, arrangement of a kitchen cupboard or clothes closet, 
etc. 

Spelling.--Na,nes of househohl articles and duties as 
f,ll,,ws : 
Furniture of a .¢peeial rnom, sueh as kitchen or sitting- 
room. kitchen utensil.¢, contents of a kitchen cupboarà, 
dishes and food uscd af a particular meal, etc. 
Manual Trafniag.--Construction of household furnish- 
ings and utensils for a doll's house from raflïa, papcr, and 
plastieine. 
A rt.Designing and eolourin earpets, eurtains, wall- 
papers, book eovers, dishes, files, ribbons, and dress 
materials. 



CORRELATIONS 45 

Sewing.--Making thc unil'orm f,,r I I,,useh,ld Man«,:c- 
ment work. 
If the t[ousêhold Management toa,.her takcs the w«,rk 
with this class, shê should follow the outline of work 
given in the ('ourse of Study. This outline will nmke lhe 
pupils familiar with the common household matcrials as 
to their sources, preparation, and cost. and when. in the 
next class, they deal with these materials, thêy will do so 
with nore interest and intelligence. It will a]so drap" 
attention to the imp,,rtan«e ,,f c¢'on,,mv tu rime ald 
energ).'. The convenicnce -f a kit,.heu and the uso of 
proper utensils fo facilitate labour will impress this tact. 
The lessons should be taught simply as information 
h_.ssons and should be of thê saine length as the other 
studies--from thirtv fo f,,rtv minut,:s. If the usual h,,ur 
and a ha]f peri«,d be set asi,lc f,,r this tlass, the rcmaindcr 
of the rime may be de'oted fo sewing. 



CIIAPTER IV 

FORM III: SENIOI; (RADE 

LESSON I 
(-'OPE ()F ]']'t)V.EII()LD .,IANAGEMENT 
Ix XTP, ODt'«].xc, the praotical side of Household Manage- 
ment fo a class, it is an advantage to let them bave a 
general idea of what the subje«.t in«.ludes. Thev will then 
work with more itfelligcn(.e and uualh" with more in- 
teres¢, q'he, tca, the prevalet i(h,a that tho subjee¢ 
means on]v cooking will be correeted from the first. 
Throughout the introduction, the teacher shou]d hot 
forger that she is dealing with imnmture mids and that 
the ideas must be very simply expressed. She might ask 
what the fui)ils expet,t fo learn in thi olas, bave them 
naine other subjeets the 3- stuC" in sch(ol, and in each cse 
lead up lo the one thing of which a particular subjeet 
treats: fi»r example, arithmetie treats of numbers; 
geography, of the world; historv, of pa.çt ecents. She 
should lead the elas fo see tiret the one thing of whieh 
ll«,useh,ld Management treats is the home; and that the 
two great requirements for a home are the hou.e, and the 
peol»]e who ]ive in if. or the occupat.*. 
To get the details relating to eaeh of these two divisions, 
let the pupils imagine they are boarding in some locality 
where they deeie fo make a home for themselves. The 
first çhing fo he done is fo choose a huilding lot. Then 
thev must deeide upon the kind of house they want and the 
plan -f the house. Af/er the bouse is built, if must be 
furnished. en the house is ready, if must he eleaned 
46 



SCOPE OF HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 47 

and kept clean. As soon a. the family more in, new 
siderations arise--they lllllst have food, whi«h must 
bought, prepared, and served ; each menti,er of the familv 
must be clothcd and e,lucat(.d: they must receive proper 
tare when sick. Only a few minutes should i,e spent on 
this intr«,ductory talk. 
While the elass is naturally led to think of and llame 
these details, they shouhl I,e written tll the i,la«.k-I,«,ard 
the order of development, s,,m«.what as follows : 
1. Household Management teaehes us about the home. 
. A home ineludcs two main ideas: 
(1) A house, (2) a falnilv. 
3. In connection with a boute we lnUSt eonsider: 
(1) The le, t, (2) the plan, (3) the furnishing. 
(4) the eleaning. 
4. In connection with a family we must consider: 
(1) Food (I)uying, cooking, ser'ing), (2) clothing 
(buying, sewing, mending), (3) education, 
(4) lmme nursing. 
Tell the pupils that a housekeeper should be inf«»rmed 
on ail of these points, but little girls «an expe(.t to studv 
only a few of them, such as questions of f«»od, clothing, and 
cleaning. 
S['RVEY OF EQUIPMENT, [NIFORM. ETC. 
Equipment.--M«»st of the time of the first lcsson should 
be used in making the pupi]s acquainted with their sur- 
roundings and individual necessities, so that they will be 
ready for work the next day. 
(ix'e each member of the class a definite working 
place, and let her examine the «'onents of the cupboard 



4, ] IOUSEHOLI» 1MANAGEMENT 

aJ,I drwcrs whi«.h I..I,m 1,, Iwr pla,'-. I..'Xld:lin that fh' 
parti««lar plan.es which the lmpils are 7ie wi]l be kept 
thr,;uh«ut the ycar. ami that. while /hev bave the privi- 
lege ,ff using and cnj«ying them. they are responsible for 
their clean]iness and ordcr. 
I%int out the remain,lor -f the cquipmenthof and 
co]d watcr-tap», t«ve] racks, class cupb.ard with its con- 
to»ts, rcfri¢erat,,r, large a«l ildiridual stores. 
Tea-h ea.h pupii h«,w t,, iight h«.r st,re and reulate 
ifs heat. 
I'if,rms. ct,..Teil the ]mpils that v,,u have shown 
them what has I,cen provided f,,r them. but 'ou want them 
als«, to i,r,ride s-m,. things f,,r th,.mselves. It will I,e neces- 
sary f«r them to bring a large, plain, white apron, having 
a Iib large cn,,ugl to pr,,te«.t the ,lress : a pair of sleevelets; 
a h,,lder; a small towel f,r pcrs«,nal use; and a white 
muslin «.ap to c,,nfine the hair while w,-,rkin. They will 
als, nccd a n,,t,.-I«,,k and pencil f,,r class, and a note-Iook 
to I,c uscd at h.me f,,r re-c,,pying the class work in ink. 
Thc latter I,,,,,k is t,, I,e rerr ncatlv writtcn anal k-pt f,»r 
rcfcren'e aft,'r it bas bcen examined by the teacher. 

LESSON II 

U8E OF EqUIPMENT 

The little girls wlm make up the classes are hot so 
far renmred fr,m their « l»layh«usc,, days that a sfirvey 
of the dishes, st«vês, and tables will hot give them an 
«.aêr dêsire to bêgin using them. This desire should be 
ratified. but as the use awavs neces.qitates the cleaning 
as well. if may le advisal,le at first fo rnake use of the 
equipment only f,»r the purpose of sh.ring proper methods 
of cleaning. 



CLEANING 49 

A short lesson on clcaning may 1»c given in a few 
minutes, and the rest of the peric, d spent in putting it int 
pra«.tice. The em-her may proceed s«,mewhat as f«,lh»ws 
in the devch»pmcnt of a lcsson on cleaning: 
DEVELOPMENT OF A LESSON* ON" ('LEANING 
MEANING OF ('LEANING 
Takc two dishosplat,,s .r saueerscxactly alikc. 
]Iaxe one clean and tlw -ther s«,ilcd with butter or 
well-known substance. Ask the clas the diffcrence 
tween them. ()ne is «lcan and «,ne dirtv. What substance 
is on one that hindcrs v«,ur sayingit is (-lcan? Butter. 
What else could be on it? Jam. What elsc? Dust. 
What else? Gravy. Now instcad ¢,f telling the naine 
the particular suhstam-c in cach case. let us trv fo find ont 
naine that will apply to all of the substaucc which, as 
vou say. make the dish dirty. Let us gire thesc substances 
a naine 'hich will shou" that they o not belong fo ihe 
plate. Wc mav call caeh ,,f them a foreign substance. 
And if I tokc the substance «,ff the plate what ara l doing 
fo the plate? {'lcaningif. Then what is clcaniug? Clean- 
ing is remo ing a foreign substance. 

5IETIIODS OF «'LEANING 
1. ,qcraping or rubbing awa!! tbe foroign subMa,ce: 
Whaf wouhl vau use fo remwe the hufter fretin the 
plate? A piece of paper or a knife. What are vou doing 
with fhe knife or paper? Scraping or rubbing off the 
foreign substance. Then how was if removed? It was 
removed by scraping or rubbin.. 
Suppose some one has sharpened a peneil and let the 
pieces fall on the tic»or, what would you take fo remove 
the foreign sui,stance from the flo.r? A. hroom. What 



50 HOUSEHOLD MANAGE3IENT 

w, uid you say you are doing with the broom? ,qweeping. 
tlow does the movement of the broom over the floor com- 
pare with the movement r,f the knife over thc plate? It 
is similar. What w.uld vou take to remove the dust from 
the window-sill? A duster. What would you say you are 
doing? I)usting. }Iow d,es the novement of the duster 
compare with the movement of the knife and the broom 
It is similar. Iu all of tbese cases of dish, floor, and sill, 
how did we rcnove the foreign sui)stance? We seraped or 
rubbed it off. Xame one wav of remoring a foreign sub- 
stance. Scraping or rubbing it away. 
2. Dissoh'ing tJe foreign ,ub.lance and lbvn .scraping 
Show a much soiled tawel and ask what is usually done 
fo «lean it. Itis washed. Ak the pupils to tell just 
what they mean by that. The towel is put in water 
and soap used «» it. What effect will the s«,ap and water 
bave on the foreign substance? They wi]l soften or dis- 
soLe it. Then what muet be d-ne next ? Thc towel must 
be rubbed on a board or with the hands. What effect has 
thi opera[ion an i]e foreign subs{an«.e? It scrapes or 
rubs ihe 5,reign substance away. Then we bave another 
wav of cleaninz: By first disso]ving the foreign substance, 
and then scraping ar rubbinz it away. 
A number of wcll-known cleaning operations may then 
be given, and the ]ml)ils aked in each case fo decide 
neth«,d uedsueh as. whiskin z a ce,af, scrul)bing a table, 
eleaning the teeth, .r washing dishes, 

CO.MMON IIOUElloLD «'LEANSIXG AGENTS 
NTcxt, get ]i.t. ,f l,e c, mmon c]eansing agents found 
in an ordinarv home, and arrange them in order of eoarse- 
ness. 



CLEANING 51 

BLA{'K-BOARD OUTLINE 
The black-I..ard se.home, as the lesson dêvelops, will 
appear as follows: 
1. Meaning of 
Cleaning is removing any foreign substance. 
2. Method« of 'leaning: 
(1) Scrapinff or ruhl,inff away the fi,reiff sub- 
stance. 
(2) I)issolving the f.reign sui»stance and thon 
scraping or rubbing if awav. 

3. Housebold cleansing agents used in lhe tirst melhod: 
(1) Duster (6) Whiling 
(2) Brush (ï) Bathbrick 
(3) Broom (8) Coarse sait 
(4) Washboard (9) Sand 
(5) Knife (10) Ashes. 

4. Household cleansing agents used in the second method: 
(1) Water (7) Washin soda 

(2) Ilot water (8) ('oal-oil 
(3) Soap (9) Ga,olene 
(4) Lux (111) Acids 
(5) Ammonia (11) Lye. 
(6) Borax 
5. Combihation cleaning agents: 
(1) Bon Ami. (?) Dutch Cleanser, (3) Sapo:lio. 

When the (.lass have these ideas, thev are readv fo put 
them into practice, and the remainder of the lesson should 
he spent in practical work. 



52 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

If the pupi]s have s-i]ed no dishes, it mav be wise fo 
drill them tirst in table washing or towel washing, so as to 
get them readv f,r the next lesson when tables and towels 
will be used. 

LESSONS III, IV, ETC. 

(;radually, in conleeti-n with the making of simple 
di«he., the pupils sh,,uld be taught special methods of dish 
wasl,in.,_,, sink cleaninff, and du.ting. Each day as they 
are appointed to different duties in cleanin, thcse methods 
sl,,uhl he stri«tly f, ll,wed u»til thcy bet'me well known. 
Whih, tilde" are still new to fhe cla.,s, it will be a great 
help t, lave outlines «tf the kinds of cleaning which are 
uo(.e,sarv in everv less., l,.sted conveniently in different 
l,arts ,f the r,,on, f,r r,.ferem.e. 
These outlines mav be as follows: 

DISH WASHINO 

Preparation for wa.¢hing: 
1. Put awav the food. 
2. ,'-;«ral»e and pile the dishcs. 
3. Put the dishes that need it fo soak. 
4. Place soap. pans, brushcs, and towel.¢. 
5. Put water in the pans. 
(1) Fill the dish pari ab«,ut half full of warm 
water, then soap it. 
(2) Fill the rinsing pan nearlv full of hot water. 

Ordcr of washing: 
1. Glass 
2. Si]ver 
3. China 
4. Crockery 

5. f;ranite ware 
6. Tins 
7. Pots 
8. Steel knives and forks. 



CLEANING 53 

Finishing after washing: 
1. Sc,ap a dish ,.h,th and wash the sides and i,,,tt, m of thc 
dish pan. before emptying if. 
2. Empty the dish l»an, rinse at the sink, and half fill with 
('lear, warm watcr, fo rinse the towcls. 
3. Wash the towels in the rinsing pari, rinse them in the 
dish pari, shake them straight, f,,hl, and hang. 
4. Soap the dish chJth, wash the inside ,,f the rinsing pari, 
empty, ril}se, ami wipe with the dish chJth. 
5. Wash and wipe the soap dish. 
,. Empty the dish pan and wipe with the dish «.l,th. 
7. Pile the pans, place the brushes and soap, and set awav. 
8. F«,ld the dish «h,th and bang it to dry. 

TABLh; ('LEANING ({'LASS WORK) 
1. If necessary, s,.rape «,r 1,rush off th,, rai,l<, stovo.. 
Z. (;et a scru], «h»th, a wash-basin of warm wat, r, and a 
scrut,-brush. 
3. Wash the part of thc tahlo use,! bv vour gr-up. ,l,,ing 
the 1,art hot o,.cupied hv the dih ashing first : thon 
gel the dish washers t, m,,ve along, so that you can 
finish if, proceeding as follows: 
(1) We the table all over. 
(2} lul, fle s-a l, cake, over it. 
(3} Seruh with the wet brush with the grain of 
the w «,,1. 
(4) Rinse tbe s,ap off with the clear water. 
(5) Wipe with the cloth wrung ,lry. 
4. Get ('lear water, linse the lwush and put it away. 
ltise the s,.ruh el»th a«l wrin it ,h'v. 
5. Take the basin and cloth fo the sink. Empty. rinse the 
basin, and drv if wifl the cl«»th: Rinse the cloth 
under the tap and wring if drv. 



54 HOUSEHOLD lIANAGEMENT 

6. Fold and bang the e]oth to dry. Brin zback a dry 
c]«,th and thorough]y drv the aluminiunl strip. 
7. Put away the dry e]oth and basin. 

SINK CLEANING 
l. Let the other housekeepers get the water they need. 
2. (;et a sink pan, a scrub cloth, and a brush. Put warm 
water in the pan. 
3. Scrub the drain board if there be one, as follows: 
(l) Wet the boar«] all over. 
(2) ]tub the soap cake over if. 
(3) Scrub with a wet brush with t]le grain of wood. 
(4} Ilinse the soap off with clear water. 
(5) Wipe with the cloth wrung dry. 
4. Wash the nickel part of the sink (tap and stand) with 
soap. Wipe with the cloth wrung dry. 
5. Wash the outside of the basin of the sink. 
6. When the other housekeepcrs bave emptied their water, 
wash the inside of the sink basin and wipe with the 
cloth wrung dry. 
7. Wash the scrul» cloth and pari, rinse the brush, and put 
all away. 
8. Polish lhe nickel with a dry duster. 

DUSTING 
1. Get a cheesecloth duster. 
?. Dust the «hairs and put them in place. 
3. Dust the table legs and drawer handles. 
4. Dust the cupboard and refrigerator. 
5. Dust the wood-work, window-sil]s, ledges, etc. 
6. Wash the duster and hang if up to dry. 



MEASURES AND RECIPES 55 

MEASURES AND IIECII'ES 

Another preliminary part of the work will be tcaching 
the pupils to measure and follow a rccipc. 

MEASURES 
The measures used in kitchen work are teaspoon, table- 
spoon, pint, quart, and gallon, of which a table should be 
developed as follows: 
3 teaspoonfuls (tsp.) ............. 1 tablespoonful (tbsp.) 
16 tbsp ........................... 1 cup 
2 cups ........................... 1 pint (pt.) 
2 pt ............................. 1 quart (qt.} 
4 elt ............................. 1 gallon (gai.) 

In connection with this table the following points 
should be brought out: 
1. That ail measurements are made level. 
2. That in measuring liquid., the mea.ure sh,ul,l bc set 
on a level surface. 
3. That to halve the contents of a spoon, the division 
should be ruade lenhwise. 
4. That fo quarter the contents of a spoon, the half 
should be divided cros.wise. 
5. That in measuring flour, it should n,»t be shaken d,,wn 
fo level if. 
6. That in using one measure for both drv and liquid in- 
gredient., the dry shouhl be mea.ure,l first. 
7. That in measuring a cupful of dry ingredients, the cup 
should be filled by using a spoon or scoop. 



56 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(a) Dividing the contents of a spoon 

(b) Dividing a spoonful in halves 



MEASURES AND RECIPES 

57 

(c) Filling a cula 

(d) Ievelling a cupful 



58 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

TABLE OF EQUIVALENT MEASURES AND WEIGIITS 
A table of equivalent measures and weights of some 
staple foods will also be useful and mav be given to the 
class : 
2 cups butter (packed solidly) .......... 1 pound 
2 c. granulated sugar ................. 1 
2 c. rice ...................... (abouti 1 " 
2 c. finely chopped meat ............... 1 " 
25 c. brown sugar ..................... 1 " 

23 c. powdered sugar .................. 1 
2§ c. oatmeal .......................... 1 " 
2 c. cornmeal ......................... 1 " 
4 c. white flour ...................... 1 " 

PLAN OF LESSON ON 5IEASURING 

TIME LIMIT 

One and one-half hours to be divided approximately 
as follows--one-half hour for teaching the theory, one- 
hall hour for tbe practical application of the theory, and 
one-half hour for housekeeping (washing of dishes, tables, 
sinks, etc., and putting the kitchen in order}. 

I'REPAILI, TIOX 
1. Place a set of measures at hand. 
2. Place a large bowl of flour on the teacher's table. 
3. Place flour and sugar in the boxes of the supply 
drawers. 
4. l'lace cans of cocoa and jugs of milk on the centre 
table. 
DEVELOPMENT 
1. lntroduction.--What do we take for a guide when 
cooking? IIow «.an we be sure that we use the exact 



PLAN OF LESSON ON MEASURING 59 

quantities tbe recipes require? Naine some measures 
that vou have learned in aritbmetic. In this lesson 
we are going to lcarn the measalres we require in 
cooking, also the proper wavs of using them. 
2. ]ames of measures.--Show and naine the measures, 
beginning at the smallest: teaspoon, tablespoon, cup, 
pint, quart, gallon. As the measures are named, 
place thcm ,m tbe table in ordcr of size. 
3. Methods of using measures.--Ask two or three pupil.% 
in turn, fo measure a teaspoonful of flour from the 
bowl on the tcacber's table. They will hot agree in 
their mea.urements, and the neces.ity f,,r levelling 
will be shown. What can we u.e for levelling 
measures? th»w can we level liquids? 
If we need less tban a spoonful, how can we 
measure it? Whicb part of the .¢poon is deeper? 
IIow shall we divide the spoonful to make both 
halves equal? How mu.t we divide a .-:poonful into 
quarters? Into eighths? Examine and explain the 
divisions of the CUl). To use (»ne mea.ure for both 
liquid and drv inzredients, which should be measured 
first ? (As these points are obtained, thev should be 
written on the black-board.) 
4. Table of measures.--In the tables of measures which 
you have learned, vou state the number of times one 
measure is contained in the next higher. We shall 
form a table of the measures learned to-day. By 
measuring flour from their boxes, let each pupil find 
how many teaspoonfuls fill a tablespoon. IIow many 
tablespoonfuls fill a cup, a half cup, a quarter of a 
cup. Thev will state the remainder of the table from 
memory. Write the table on the black-board and 
teach the abbreviations. 



60 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

NOTE.--A[ter the lesson on measuring is developed, the 
class should be given individual work which will put these 
ideas into practice. A simple recipe may be dictated by the 
teacher, step by step. Cocoa makes a good recipe for this 
lesson, as it affords practice in measuring liquids as well as 
dry ingredients, both powdered and granular. If each girl 
makes hall a cupful of cocoa, it will give practice in dividing 
the coztents of a spoon. 

]Iave each [,upil n,ake half a eupful of cocoa by carrying 
out ea«h step as it is dictated hv the tcaehcr, as follows: 
1. Numberg one [,ut two cupg of water in thc tea kcttle; 
nnlbcrs two ]izht a re and put the water fo boil: 
numl,cr threc zet c.«,«oa frmn thc centre table; 
number f,,ur get milk. 
. Set out sugar boxes ad open them. 
2. Ea¢.h take a small sacepan, a measuring cup, a tea- 
si»con, a l»aring-knife, a«[ u sma]l eup. 
4. Mcasure ha]f a tcasl»O«,nful of suzar into the sauce- 
5. Mcasure ha]f a teaspo, mful of eocoa into the saucepan. 
6. Mix the suar ad c,»«,,a bv shakinz the saucepan. 
ï. Mea»urc hall of a third of a eupful of boiling water 
and stir it into the sugar and cocoa. 
8. Set the mixture over a zcnt]e tire and stir until it 
bubb]e. ('ook for three minutes. 
9. Mcasure half ,f a third of a eupful of milk. 
10. Stir the milk into the mixture and heat it until it is 
steamin lmt. but d m,t hoil it. 
11. Serve the cocoa in the small cups. 
1. Turn out tbc rires and put thc saucepans fo soak. 



PRACTICAL WORK 61 

SERVING 

Each pupil purs her table in order 1,v nloving ail 
cooking utensil. to the metal part of tlle table an,1 wipinz 
off any soiled spots (,n the wo,Jd.n part; she then sits 
drink the eoc)a she has ruade. 

N(tTE-TAKI N( 
N[,t[,s are (.[,],icd fr,m thc b]a['k-b,ard 
.rdinarv class n,tc-books. Thc dcsk boards undcr thc 
table tol,S arc pullcd [,ut f,,r this purpose. 
the notes consist of: 
1. Table of measures, with al,brcviations 
2. I',ints in mcasuring 
3. Recipe for cocoa (if thcre are recipe [.ards, these shouhl 
be distributed). 

IIOUSEKEEPIXO 
This will be done in grups of f.urs, a'cording ¢[, their 
1)revious lesson. in clcanin.. If necessary, s,me special 
clcaning, as dish washing or sink clcanin 7 mav be taugllt 
al this point of the lesson: 
1. Xumlwr one will wash dishcs fiw hcr gr[,up. 
2. Number two will wipe dishcs fi,r lier gr[,up. 
3. Numl»er three will clean the entire lai,le behmging h, 
her group. 
4. Number four will do work outside of her group as 
appointed, su(-h as dusting, cleaning a sink .r thc 
(.entre table. 



62 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 
]IECII'I.] FOR COCOn. 
1 tsp. sugar, b c. boiling water 
1 tsp. cocoa b c. milk. 
I. MiX the sugar and cocoa in a saucepan. 
2. tir the I«dling water it« the mixture, then set it over 
a gentle heat. 
3. Keep stirring uttti] thê mixture Imbh]es, tben b,,il 
gent]?" for about three minutes. 
4. Stir in the mi]k and heat if unti] if steams, but do 
not boil it. 
5. Serve the eoeoa hot or iee-eohl. 

RECIPES 
:In conncction with a rccipe, the pupils should be 
taught to look for three parts: 
1. The naine 
2. The list and amount of ingredients 
3. The method. 
In carrying out a recipe, they should, from the tîrst, 
be taught fo work in thc following systematic order: 
1. To attend to the tire if necessary 
2. T, collect the necessary utensils 
3. To collect the necessary ingredients 
4. To obey the method. 



RECIPES 63 

For this lesson, some simple recipe which will review 
measuring should be elearly writtcn on the black-board-- 
the reeipe for al»pie sauce or cranberry sauce would "be 
suitable. While the pupils are learning obedience in 
ïollowing a reçipe, if is'better to keep them together in 
(.arrying out their work. The method shouhl be written 
in definite, numbered steps, which may be checked off as 
eaeh step is accomplished. 
When the class has had in.truction in cleaning, measur- 
ing. and recipe., thev arc rcadv for a series of lcssons 
involving the use of simlde recipe. whieh will put into 
practice the ideas thev have lcarned. For thi. practice, 
sueh recipcs as the ï, llowing are suggested : 
Boiled potatoes, mashed p«»tatoes; boilcd parsnips; 
boiled celerv; h-ilcd carrot., asparagus, green pcas: cran- 
berrv saut.e: rhubarb sauce" preparing and coml»inin,,,, in- 
gredients for salads (fruit salad., potato salad, cabbage and 
nut salad, Wald,:rf salad)--the dressing being supplied; 
stuffed eggs; sandwiches. 
The carrying out of these lessons will develop in the 
pupils aecuracy and obedience, and make thelu ïamiliar 
with the use and tare of their utenils, as well as give 
Ol»l»ortunity for the cleaning of these and other parts oï 
the equipment. 
During these first lessons, careïul supervision shouhl 
be given each pupil, so that onlv correct habits mav be 
formed in regard to neatness, thorou._-hnes., quietness, and 
natural use of muscles. 
The pupils should be encouraged to begin a book of 
recipes fo contain neatly written copies of all thev have 
used in school. Tle Art teacher might correlate the work 
here by assisting them fo design a suitable cover for this 
book. 



('IIAPTEII V 

FORM II1: ENI)I ;IkXI)E (('t,ntinued) 

('OOKEItY 
LESSON I 

.\v-m a number «,f praoti«.e h.ssons llave deveh,ped in 
the pupil. a certain abilitv and self-cbnfidem-e lu w«,rkin. 
fornlal eookery mav be iutrodueed, and the following ideas 
hould he hr-uht out" 
1. The meanilg of eooking" 
/'oaking is the application of ueient heat fo 
make a ehane in the foc,& 
2. ]leasons f.r eo.king f.od" 
( 1 ) Te, makc se,me food diestible. 
(2) T. ehane flavaurs and make some food more 
appetizin. 
(3) 
(t) To kill harmful germs in food. 
3. Kinds of heat ued: 
(1) Drv heatheat, only, is eunveved fo the food. 
(2) M,,ist heatheat and moisture are eom'eved to 
the 
4. Different wavs of app]yin dr v heal: 
Toasting, broiling, pan-hroiling, saut6in, frying. 
haking. 
5. Different wavs of app]ying moi«t 
Boiling, simnlering, steaming, steeping. 
NOTE.If tho elass eannot naine theso methods, tho teaeher 
may naine and write them with only a word of comment 
regarding eaeh, or they may not be given until tho methods 
are studied. 
64 



THE THERMOMETER 65 

As the m,ist beat meth«ls are sinq,lcr ami l,etter 
known, they shouhl he studied first. The «lass shouhl he 
led fo see tbat some liquid must he used te, sup],]y the 
moisture and should aceount for the c.mmon use of water 
for this purpose. Experiments should tben be I»erformed 
in heating water, and its al, l,earance and temperature 
sbould be noted. 

NO'rE.--A preliminary lesson on the use of tho thermometer 
may bo necessary to show how to read it, and to develop the 
idea that it is an instrument for measuring heat. This may 
be taught in the regular class work, previous to the House- 
hold Management lesson. 

LESON ON TIIE .FIIERMtMI.:TI-:I: 
1. Develol»ment of tbe idea of '" measuring "" 
What would )'ou use fo measure the length «,f the 
table? A foot measure. Wbat to measure the water in 
a tub? A pint. quart, or galh,n measure. What to 
measure the amount «,f gas I,urned ? A gas-nwter. 
2. Development of the naine "' tberxnometer": 
What do we eall tbe instrument 
F,r measurin gas? A zas-meter 
F,r measuring eleetri«itv? An electr-nwter 
For measurin speed of a motor? A sl,eed«»nwt.r 
(speed-meter) 
For measuring the distance a bievele travels? A 
eyelometer (eyelo-meter). 

In eaeh case what does " meter" mean ? It meas 
instrument for measurin. What naine mav I give fo an 
instrument for measuring heat? You may call it a heat- 
rneter. 



66 ttOUSEHOLD hiANAGEMENT 

Tell the pupi]s that, in science, many (;reek words 
are used, and that cou will put a [;reek word in place of 
the English word "heat", namcly "thermos". as in 
thermos bottlc. Wbat will the name become? Thermos- 
mcter, or thermometcr. 
3. l'factice in using therm,,meters" 
The unit «,f measurement (degree) should be given, 
and the scale taught from the black-board. Thermometers 
mav thon be givcn to the class to examine and use. 
Saucepans having white inner surfaces are best fo use 
f,,r the expcriments, as changes ruade by thc heat are more 
plainly seen. 

Obserration. o] watvr undcr heat : 
(1) 2.t a tcmpcraturc of al«,ut lt0 dcgrs, verv 
small bubbles form at the bottom and sides 
«,f the dish and rie slow]y t, tbe surface of 
the water. Thcse bubbles are a film of water 
«.ntainin the air that was in solution, which, 
when expaudcd, rises to the t.p of the watcr. 
() At a telnp'rature of al«.ut l0 degrees, a few 
]arzer bubbles form at the b«.ttom ,,f the dish 
and rise s]ow]v to the surface of the water, 
makin a slight m«,v«.m«.lt in it. In thesc 
hubl,les air is replaced by steam which is 
formed fr«,m the water l»y the heat. 
(3) Af a temperature of 212 derees, a eat number 
of Large bubhlcs f, rm and rise quickly fo the 
surface, making much mo-ement in the water. 
The water is then said to hoil. 
() The water will take no higher temperature than 
212 degrees. 



THE THERMOMETER 

67 

(5) After watcr once boils, it requires ]ittle leat 
keep it af this point, therefore the heat may 
be redue.cal. 
(6) An increase -f heat increases the number, size, 
and rate of tlle bubbles and the volume of 
steam, but makes the liquid no hotter. 

.1 pplication of these obserrations: 
(1) If food be cooked in a liquid at its greatest heat, 
xvhere lUally bubbles are making nmeh nlove- 
ment in it, the process is ealled boiling. 
(2) If eooked in a liquid heated to lsO-2ol, where 
there is scarcely any lnovement in the liquid, 
the proeess is called simmering. 
(3) If cooked in the steam rising from a boiling 
liquid, the proeess is ealled steaminç. 
(t) If boilillg liquid be p«,ured over food and no 
further heat applied, the proeess is ealled 
steepinç. 

LESSONS II, III, IV, ETC. 

Practiee S]l«,uld then i»e given in ea«h of the m«,ist heat 
methods of cookinz. The ce,ronron foods, such as vegetables, 
fruit, eggs. and milk shouid l»e used for this purpose. 
After the class has carried .ut a meth,d frr the first 
rime, thev should be led to consider the order of work 
required f«.r it. The necessary steps sh«»ul,1 be arraned 
fo form a set of rules for reference. The effects of the 
method in each case should also be noted. 
When the moist heat methods are well known, the dry 
heat methods shouid be tauzht and practised. The out- 
lines on pages 73-81 will suggest the development undêr 
each method. 



68 IIOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

I»LAN " LE..3_'SON ON IOILING (..-RROT.'-5 

AIM 

%, al,l,lY the l,rhwil,k's ,,f b,,ili,v, as taught in a 
previous lesson, to the eooking of food. 

TIME LIMIT 

One and one-half hours fo i,e use, l approximatêly as 
follows: tweuty-fivê minutes f,,r preparation for practiea] 
work and the tiret part of thc l,ra,'ti,'al work, twentv-five 
minutes f,,r the ,levcl,,l,m,.nt «,f i,lcas ,,f I,oilin as a 
method of eooking, fifteen minutes for the serving of 
food, twentv-five minutes f,,r housekeeping. 

I'REP'tRATION Fol: I'RA«'TI{'AL WORK 

P, eview.--)uesti,m the pi, plis as follows: What kind 
of heat is used in e««,kin.,.., food l,v boiling? Af 
what teml,erature is the fod eooked bv this method ? 
Naine thé ki,ds «,f I,,,ili,g. ]h»w mueh botter is 
rapid boilin.? th,w is water ruade to boil rapidly? 
When is rapid I,oiling us,.ful? 

Diseussi.n of recil,e.llave the reeipe written oa the 
l,la-k-hoard ami read hv c,ne «,f the lml,ils, while thc 
others f-llow the readin. carefulh'. 

(1) l[ave the t'ia.-s deeide: 
(a) "fil,en fle rires shouhl I,e lighted 
(I,) The dis/ms rt«{uired for the wt, rk 
(ci Th,' kin,l «,1' I,oiling t, use. 
(?) Ienu,nstrate lhe serul,bing, seraping, and dicing 
of a earrot, also the draining of a food eooked 
in liquid. 



PLAN OF LESSON ON BOILING 69 

(3) State the quantity of ingredients each will use. 
(4) Caution the pupils as fo accuracy, neatness, and 
quietness while working. 

PR{'TICAL WORK 

Have each pul)il preparo the food a««ording te, the 
recipe and put it on to cook witbin a certain rime. While 
the class works, carefullv observe eaeb pupil and give in- 
dividual help t. tbo.e who require it. 

DEVI-:LOPMENT OF TItE IDEAs OF BOILING 
AS ..METII(D OF COOKING 

This will be donc while tbe earrots are cooking Tbe 
ideas brought out from review and the class work, hy 
questioning, will be tbose which are given on boiling under 
the metbods of cooking. 
1. Definition of boiling 
2. Kinds of boiling 
3. Uses of rapid boiling 
4. P, ules for boiling 
5. Effects of boiling. 
As these ideas are obtained from tbe class, they should 
be written bv tbe teaober on the black-board and bv the 
pupils in their note-books. 

.ERVIXG 
The pupils will drain, season, and serve the food. 
Each girl will set ol]e place on the woodcn part of the 
table and serve herself. While the fo«»d is being eaten, 
the table manners of each girl .-lmuld be observed, and, if 
nccessary, corrected in a tactful manner. 
6 H.M. 



70 

HISTO .... "- ,-, -F-.,  uI 
HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMEN 

ItOUSEK EEPING 
The w(»rk of putting the kitchen in order may be done 
in groups of twos or fours. 

REC1PE : BO1LED 
Carrots Sait and pepper 
Boiling water Butter. 

1. Scrub, serai)e, aml rinse thc carrots. 
2. Cut them into pieces by dicing tbem. 
3. Put the pieces in a saucepan, set oxer the tire, and pour 
in boiling water until the food is covcred. 
4. ('««,k the carrots until tbe pieces arc sort af the centre 
whea pierced with a fork. 
5. Drain off the liquid, flen season the food with salt, 
peppcr, and butter. 
6. Serve in a h,,t vegetab]e dish. 

PLAN OF LEs.oN oN ,qlMMEIHNG: APPLES 

I NTRODU_'TIOX 
1. Review : 
(1) Appearance and tempêrature of a boiling liquid. 
(2) Appearance and temperature of a simmering 
liquid. 
2. State the difficulty of keeping a liquil af simmering 
temperature; show the double boiler and êxplain ifs 
use for this purpose. 
3. Compare boiling and simmering as to lêngth of rime 
required and difiïculty. 
4. Te|l the pupils they are going fo study simmering by 
making Coddled Apples. 



LESSON ON SIMMERING 71 

DISCUSSION OF RECIPE 
1. Read recipe. 
:. Question regarding" 
(1) Kind «,f heat used 
(2) Wlether to prepare apples or syrup first and why 
(3) Management in measuring so as to use only one 
cup 
(4 0 Why one quantity of syrup is suflïeient for so 
many apples. ' 
3. Decide on the dishes required for the work. 

Assign work in gro. W of twos--number.q {,ne and 
three prepare syrup" numbers two and four preparc apples ; 
ail attend fo the cooking. 

DEVELOI'MENT OF IDEA OF .IMMEI[.ING 
(To be dealt with while food is cooking) 
1. Definition.--Obtain this by comparing simmering with 
boiling. 
2. Effeets : 
,. idea of "soft and tender" 
(2) Tell the pupils simmerinz telnperature will not 
• "  i harden and toughen meat and %_:« as mueh 
as boilinz does. 
(8) Lyg lon.er in the licptid fo cdok dissolves out 
more of the f.od .cul»stance. 
(4) Less water oin z off as vapour: does hot carry 
away as llltleh flvour. 
(5) Less motion in the liquid does not break up the 
food. 



72 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

SEI:VIXG 
When the apples are tender, let cach grl serve herself 
with what she bas cookcd. While the fruit is being eaten, 
direct att,ntion t,, the ftavour of al,pie iu the syrup. 

IIOUSEKEEPI XG 
Assign the work which is neeessarv to put the kitchen 
lu ordcr, and allow the pupils to carrv if out lu groups of 
twos or fours. 

I/E('II'E (IXDIVIDUAL) : t'ODDLFI) APPLES 
1 aPple 
• c. sugar 
4 
½ c. water. 

1. Put the su.zar and water in the inside part of a double 
hoiler, set over the tire, and boil gently for about 
rive miimtes. 
2. Wash an,l pare the apple, eut it into hahes, and remove 
the core. 
3. Put the prei,arê,l fruit into the svrup, cover the dish 
closely, and set in the under part of the double 
boiler. 
4. Simmer the pieces of applc until tender, turning them 
occasionallv. 
5. Lift the fruit carefullv into a serving dish, then pour 
the syrup over if. 
6. Serve hot or cold. 

NOTE.--One cup of sugar will make suflicient syrup for 
six or seven apples. 



METHODS OF COOKING 73 

IIETHODS OF COOKING: DETAILS 

BOILING 
1. Definition : 
Boiling is a method of cookin 
reaches the food through a boiling liquid. 
2. Kinds of boiling: 
(1} (;entlc boiling--tempcrature of 17 degrees. 
(2) Rapid 1,oiling--temperature «,f 21 .) degrees. 
3. Uses of rapid boiliug 
(1) To make much steam 
(2) To break up food 
(3) To keep small particles of food in motion. 
4. Rules for boiling: 
(1) 

(3) 

in which the heat 

Put the food in a cooking di:h..cet over the heat. 
and pour in the lmiling liquid to eover the food 
well. 
P, egulate tbe heat fo the kind of hoiling required. 
Keep the food boiling during the entire eooking. 
Continue the cooking until the food is tender at 
the centre when it is tested, or for the rime 
required bv the reeipe. 

(2) It makes some food hard and tough---eggs, etc. 
(3) It breaks up food. 
(4) It dissolves out some of the food substance. 
(5) It causes some loss of flavour (in the steam). 
(6) It kills germs. 

tables. 

(5) When the food is eooked, lift it from the liquid 
or drain the liquid fr,nl the food. 
5. Effccts of boiling: 
(1) It makes some food sort and tender--fruit, vege- 



temperature of about 1 ,q0 degree.s. ,. 

7 ! HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 
.I 
SI,IMERING 
1. Definition" 
: | , '1 ,, 
Simmering is a method of «o.okin in a. ,liquid at a 

Rules for simmering: 
(1) Use a double boiler to keë p tle temperature 
correct. 
(?) l'ut the food in liquid in the t,»p di.,h, and pro- 
ceed as in hoiling. 
I 
3. Effects of simmerbz .. 

(1) It makes some foods sort and tender--fruit and 
vegetables. 
(2) It d,:,es hot make the protein of animal food 
(milk. egs, aml meat} bar,1 as boiling does. 
(3) ]t dissolves out a o,-,,l deal of the food substance 
into the eooking ]iqi,1. 
(4) I t «aus«.s very little lo.s -f flaw_,ur. 
(51 It does hot break up the food. 

STEAMING 
l. Definition : 
,teaming is a method of cooking in the steam from 
boilin liquid. 

2. Rules for steaming: 
(1) /Iave the water boiling rapidly in the under part 
of the steamer. 
(2) Put the food in the upper part, cover closely, and 
place over the lower part. 
(3) Keep the water boiling rapidly during the entire 
eooking. 



METHODS OP COOKING 75 

(4) If extra water I»e needed, only I»oiling water 
should be added, as quickly and as gently as 
possihle. 
(5) Continue the cooking according fo the rime re- 
quired bv the recipe, or test as in boiling, if 
the food permits. 
3. Effects of steaming: 
(1) If makes vegetable food tender. 
(2) It naakes the protein of animal food harder than 
silnlnering, but hot so hard as boiling doês. 
(.3) it does hot break up the food. 
(4) It doês hot dissolve out the food substance. 
(5) It causes little loss of flavour if closely covered. 

STEEPING 
1. Definition : 
Steeping is a method of cooking, by pouring boiling 
water over food, and letting if stand in a moderately warm 
place. 
2. Rules for steêping: 
(1) Heat the stêe.ping dish. 
(2) Use water freshly boiled. 
(3) Put the food in the hot dish, pour water over, 
cover clo.ely, and set in a warm place. 
(4) Let the food remain in the liquid until you have 
extraeted what is desirêd. 
(5) Strain off the liquid and use as rêquirêd. 
3. Effects of steeping: 
(1) To heat and often the food. 
(2) To extract the flavour and, somêtime., the sub- 
stance of the food. 



76 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

TOASTING 
1. Iefinition: 
Toa.ting is a method of eooking in whieh the heat 
reaches the food direetlv from the tire. It is u.ed mainly 
for bread. 

2. Pules for toasting: 
(1) ]lave a «lear, hot tire. 
(2) Cut brea,1 in slices fr«,m one third fo one hall an 
inch thick. 
(3} IL,h1 the food at some distance from the tire, in 
a gentle heat af fir.t, fo dry and heat the sur- 
faces. This drying may be donc in the oven. 
(J) Then hold the dried, hot surfaces iii a strong heat, 
to brown and cri.p them. 
(5) Serve so that the surfaces will n-t become steamed 
fr.m the m,,isture still «,ntained i the slip.es. 
Put the toast in a toa»t-ra«k or stat'k it ou a 
hot plate. Buttered toa.,t mav he piled. 
3. Effeets of toasting: 
(1) To heat and drv the surface of the food. 
(2} To brown and crisp the surface. 
(3) Toehan the flavour. 
(4) To ehmge the stareh of tho surface ino a brown 
sub»tance, which i. a form of .sugar, and more 
digestible than starch. 

BROILI.N'G 
1. Definition : 
Broiling is a method of eooking in wh[eh the heat 
rea«hes the food direetlv. It is used mainly for meat and 
fish in sliees or rhin portions. 



METHODS OF COOKING 77 

2. Rules for broiling: 
(1) ][ave a clear, hot tire. 
(?) (;rcase thc broilcr and trim the food. 
(31 Lay the food in the broiler conlpactly. 
(4) I[old tllc broiler in a very strong hcat to seal the 
tubes of the f,,od which hohl thc juices, and 
turn frequcntly. 
(5) When the surface is seared, ho}d iu a gonfler heat 
fo cook the food to the centre, ail,| turn occa- 
sionally while doing this. 
(6) Tinle the cooking to the thickness of the food-- 
one ineh of thickness cooks rare in eight 
minutes. 
(7) Serve at ouce on a h,,t dish, and spread with 
butter, salt. and pcpl»cr. 
3. Effects of broiling: 
(1) To star the surface. 
(2) To cook to the centre while browning the surface. 
(3) To change the flavour and devclop a verv dclici- 
ous Che in the br«,wned surface. 
(4) To make the browned surface hard to digest. 

P_N-BIlOlLIXfl 
1. Dcfinition - 
Pan-broiling is an iluitation of broilin and i.a a 
lnethod of eookiug on a his.ail-h,,t, lnetal surface. 
2. Rules for pan-broiling: 
(1) IIave a hot tire. 
(2) Ilcar the pan or metal surface until if hisses 
when tonehed with water. 
(.3) Lav tlle food in eompaetly, an,l turn eonstantly 
until the entire surface is seared. 



78 ItOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(t1 l'lace tbe pan in a gcnt]o ]wat and o,ok the food 
fo the centre, turniug o«.«-asi««mlly. 
(5) Time the eooking fo the thiekness of the food 
one ineh eooks rare in ten minutes. 
, erre 
(6)  at once, as in broiling. 
3. Effects of pan-broiling: 
The saine as in broiling. 

.AUTÉING 
1. Definition : 
Sautéing i. a methad of cookingin whieh the heat 
reaehes tle food through a smoking-hot, greased surface. 

2. llules for snutéin: 

(1) Heat the pan enough fo melt the fat. 
(2) fut in jnst enough fat to keep the food from 
sticking, and let it run over the surface of the 
pan. and get smoking hot. 
(3) Put in the ï.,d and let it br,,wn on one side, then 
turn it and hrown the other side. 
(4) ,qerve on a hot dish. 

3. Effeets of sautéing: 
(1) To sear the surface of the foo& 
(2/ To brown the surface and develop a 
flavour, while cooking to the centre. 
(3) 

(4) 

delicious 

To make the surface slightly fat-soaked with fat 
whieh has been verv hihly heated. 
To make the surface indigestible. 

BAKING 
1. Definition : 
Baking is a mcthod of cooking in which the heat is 
brought fo the food through the confined heat of an oven. 



METHODS OF COOKING 79 

2. Kinds 

of ovens : 
Sic,w. 
Moderate--hitc pawr hr«,wns in en minutes. 
Ih,t--white paper hrowllS in rive minutes. 
Verv h,t--white paper 1,rowns in one minute. 

3. Rules 
() 
(2 

for baking : 
lleat the oven according to the recipe. 
Put the food in the OVell, usualiv on the lower 
shelf, to zet ail und«.r heat tir»t, then toward 
the la.t of the «.o«,king. set it {}ll the t«,p shelf 
to hrown. 
(3) Watch carefullv durinz thc hakinz, but in open- 
ing the oven door, he entle and quiek. 
(4) If the oven get.¢ t«,o hot..et a pan of cold water 
in it. or leave the d«,«»r .iightly «,pen. If browll- 
in too qui«kl.v. ««wer the surface with hr,wn 
papêr. 
(5/ Cook thê food aeeordin te, thê time rêquired hv 
thê rêeipê, or until it is «lune. as .hown bv somê 
test. 

FRYIN-G 
1. Definition : 
Frying is a method of cooking in which the heat is 
brought fo the food by immersing if in .qnoking-hot fat. 
2. Temperature for frying" 
(1) For cooked foods which have only fo hrown and 
warm through--ahuut 4110 degrees. 
(?) For raw f.ods whi«.h bave to cook--about 350 
degrees. 



8{) HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

l:ulcs for frying: 
(l) Use a deep iron. steel, or gratuite kettle, which 
will hold the heat. 
('.) Put in suftident fat to e»ver the food well, but 
never fill the kettle more than two-third. full. 
(:]) lIeat thc fat fo the «lesired temperature. 
(4) llave th«, f,,.d as drv as possible and m»t verv 
e»ld. 
(5} Whcn the fat begins fo give off a sma]l quantity 
of while val«,r, test it f¢,r thc required heat. 
as f«dlov. : 
(a) F.r rar f.,,], put in a .mall square of bread, 
and allow it sixty sccoml. fo brown. 
(h) Ft, r cookcd fo-d, allo" a square of bread 
forty second. fo brown. 
(C,) l'u{ thc f,,,d .arcfully into file hot fat, and only 
an amount which will hot cool it too much. 
(î) When the food is nicely brovncd, lift if from the 
fat with an open spo,n or lifter and drain over 
the pot until it ste, p., dripping. 
(8} Lay the food on crumpled brown paper or blot- 
ting paper, fo al»sorb any fat stil! elinging fo 
the surface. 
(9) ,qtrain the fat through eheeseeloth and set if 
away fo eool. 

4. Effect.* of frying: 
(l) To sear the surface and prevent it from absorbing 
fat. 
(2) To eook or heat the food to the centre. 
(3) To brown the surface of the food and make it 
erisp. 



METHODS OF COOKING 81 

(4) To develop a delicious flaour in the browncd 
surface. 
(5) To make the browned surface indigestible, 
cause it has absorbed highly-heated fat. 
NOTE.--AS frying requires the fat used to be at a very high 
temperature, it is dangerous to let young children take the 
responsibility in this method of ¢ooking. For this reason, it 
may be wise to defer lessons on frying until the Fourth Form. 
or even later. 

For practice in the methods of cooking, the following is 
suggestive : 
Boiling.--('ooking of anv vegetahlc or fruit in season or 
rioe. macaroni, e««« eoffee 
Simmering.Dried fruit, such as prune», peaches, apri- 
cors, apples; strong-smelling vegetables, such as cab- 
bage, onions; porridge ; stew 
Steaming.Potatoes. cauliflower, apples, pcachcs, cup- 
puddings, dumplings, fish 
Steeping.--Tea, coffee, lemon rind for sauce 
Toasting.--Bread, rolls 
Broiling.--Steak, fish 
Pan-broiling.--Steak 
Sautéin.--Sliced potatoes, potato eakes, hash eakes, 
griddle-cakes (teacher prepares the batter) 
Baking.--Apples, bananas, potatoes, scalloped potatoes, 
scalloped tomatoes, cheese crackers, drop biscuits, 
beef-loaf 
Frying.--Potatoes, cod-sh halls, doughnu/s (teacher pre- 
pares the dough). 



82 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

The lessons whi«.h give praetice in the methods of 
cooking will also affol'd excellent drills il measuring, 
manipulation, and cleaning. Throughout ail these, the 
weak points of individual members of the elass should 
reeeive eareful attention. In the case of typical defeets, 
nmeh rime mav be savcd bv cal]in the attention of the 
elass te these, instead of correetin them individually. 
After the pupi]s ]lave eonsidel'ed and praetised the 
metbods of «.ookin. they should be al,le t,» prepare any 
simple dish «,f one main ingredient, fl-,r whieh reeipes 
shouhl be iven. If fimse canner h. used at schoo], thev 
mav be of service in the h-mes of the pupils. 
Econ,,lUV should ho emp]msize,l by sugzesting simplc 
wavs of using ]eft-overs, nd definite reeipes shou]d be 
written for these. Faner cookinz shou]d be discouraged. 
Tbe tea«.her shou]d aire te show how the necessarv common 
foods mav he prepared in a nutritious and attractive 
lalllleç. 
In this first vear of praetieal work, the main point is 
the formation of correct habit.¢ of »'orZ'. ('lean]iness. neat- 
ness. and ac«.uraev shouhl be insisted on in everv lesson, 
and deftness should ],e encoura.ed. 

SUGGESTIONS FOR THE USE OF LEFT-OVERS 

BREAD 
1. Toast for zarni.hing stews and hash 
9 (-'routolls for soup 
3. Bread crumbs te use for croquettes and scalloped 
dishe.% or for stuflïlJZ moat and tïsh 
4. Pudding (chocolate bread puddinz, cabinet pudding, 
plain bread pudding, brown betty) 
5. Pan««lkc.. 



SUGG,ESTIONS FOR USE OF LEFT-OVERS $3 

CAKE 

1. Pudding (steamed until jus re-heated and ser-ed with 
a sauce) 
2. Puàding (baked in a custard mixture) 
3. Trifle. 
I EAT 

1. Meat pie or potato and meat pie 
o.. Meat loaf 
3. Stew with dumplings 
4. Hash 
5. Scalloped meat 
6. Croquettes 
ï..Ieat moulded in gelatine 
8. Salad (light meats only) 
9. Sandwiches. 

1. Scalloped fish 
2. Salad. 

1. Stuffeà e«us 
2. Harà-boiled for salaà 
3. Garnish for salad 
4. Sandwiches. 

1. Cheese crackers 
2. Cheese straws 
3. Cheese cream toast 
4. Cheese omelet 
5. Cheese salad 
6. Welsh rarebit 
7. Macaroni and cheese 
8. Sandwiches. 

FISH 

EGGS 

CHEESE 



84 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

% EGETABLES 
1. Seal]ope«] rejetable 
?. Crcam of vcgetab]e soup (water in which vegetable is 
cooked should be kept for this) 
3. Sautéd vegetab]es 
4. Salad. 
'A \'NED FI{UIT 
1. Cup pudding or roi 3" po]y 
?..";teamed or baked barrer pudding 
:;. l'u,hling sauce (strail juice and thicken) 
4. Triflc 
5. Fruit salad 
6. Gelatine mould. 

BEVERAGES 

After the moist hcat methods of. cooking are learne0, 
a special le.¢»on on bevera:,cs may be taken, if the tcacher 
thinks it desirable. If the subject be hot taken as a whole, 
each beveragc mav bc taught incidcntal]y, when a recipe 
requiring little rime i. u.eful. The following will suggest 
an outlinc of fact. for a formal lcsson: 

ME-NING OF BEVEIIAGES 

A beverage is a ]iquid suitable for drinking. Water is 
tbe natural beverage; other beverages are water with in- 
gredients added to supp]y food, flavour, stimulant, or 
colour. Since water is taste]ess in itself and a]so an 
excellent soh-ent, it is especially useful in making 
beveraes. 



BEVERAGES 85 

KINDS OF BEVERAGES 
1. Refreshing.--'ure «-ohl water, ail cohl fruit drinks 
2. Stimulating.--All hot drinks, tea, coffee, beef-tea, 
ale.h.li«, drinks 
3. Xutritious.--Milk, c¢coa, ('hoJ'olate, oatmcal and barlev 
water, tea and coffee with sugar and crealn. 
NoTE.--As tea. coffee, and eoeoa are ordinary household 
beverages, they should be speeially studied. Their sources 
and manufacture will bave been learned in Form III Junior. 
but their use as beverages may now be discussed and prac- 
tised. It is desirable that the pupils be led to reason out 
correct methods of cooking eaeh. 

TEA 

2. Method of e-oking.--Steep the tea froln three to rive 
milmtes, then separate the leaves fr.m the liquid 
(eu. »et. wavs of d,ing this). B.ilinff is n.t a 
('.rreet method fo use f¢r making tea. a» if extracts 
the tannil and causes l,-,s of flar¢ur in the steam. 
NoTE.--Because of the stimulant, young people should hOt 
drink tea or coffee. 
COFFEE 
1. Deseriptioll.--The beans, or seeds. «,f ««ff(,e al« c.ntain 
tannin as well as a stimulant and flavour. This 
beverage is more expenive than fea. since a much 
7 



86 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

larger amount must be used for one cup of liquid. 
After the beans are broken bv grinding, the air 
causes the fla'our to deteriorate, so that the house- 
keeper should grind the beans as required, or buy 
in small quantities and keep in tihtly covered cans. 

:. Method of cooking.--Coffee mav be cooked in different 
ways, according to the size of the pieces into which 
lhe roasted i)eans are broken. These pieces are 
much harder than the leaes of tea, hencc coffce may 
1,e gien a highcr tcmpcrature and a ],,nger rime 
in cooking than tca. ,mall pieces «,f bcans are apt 
fo float in the liquid, makin._,z if eloudv; this may be 
overeonle bv the use of e,gg-white or bv careful 
handling. 
Coarsely ground coffec must bc loilcd gently. 
Finely gr,und coffee mav be boiled gcJtly or steeped. 
Very finely gr«und. ,r pow,lcred coffee should be 
steeped or tltered with boiling watcr. 

COCOA 

1. Deseription.'l'his cotabl.q a stimulalt, 
from tea and coffee in being nutritious. 
desirable drink f«r ehildren. 

but differs 
It makes a 

2. Method of eooking.--:'«woa e«,ntains starch and should 
be simmered or gently boiled. 

CHOCOLATE 

This substance is the saine as cocoa, except that if con- 
tains a much larger amount of fat. 



TABLE SETTING 87 

TABLE SETTIXG 

The serving of food is incidentally a n.ecessary part 
of nearly every lesson in cookery, as the pupils usually 
eat what thev prepare. ]1 regular class work the bare 
work table is uscd. ant each 1)upil prepares a pla«-e 
herself onlv. The dishes soiled during the less,m sbouhl 
1,e placcd on the section coxcred with mctal ,,r glass at 
the back of the tal,le, and the front. ,,r wo,,den part. 
cleared to be used as a dinin. table. The teacher shouhl 
insist on this part being clean and neatlv arrange,l. The 
few dishes used should-be the m,,:t suitable seleete,1 fr,,m 
the individual equipments, and fbev sb,,uhl be as car,,- 
fullv placed as for a meal. Fronl tbe ery first, the 
pupils sh«,uld be trained tf, habits «,f neafness in settinz 
the table, an4 in serving the f«,,,l: an,l.' wbat is n»,st 
important, thev shoul,1 1,e trained tf, eat in a refined 
manner. La(.k «,f rime is sr, metime.¢ ._,zien as an excuse 
for negleetin.z this frainin.,.., in the u.ual c,,»kerv lest, ms: 
but if the feaeber insiste upt)n neafnes» in work and 
tal,le manners, tbe pul,ils will s,«,n learn t,, coml,ly witb- 
out I«,ss of rime. 
Layin.z a tal,le mav be fi, rmallv tau._-dt at anv sta:ze 
«,f the w«)rk of F,,rm 111. but it is me,st suitable after the 
c]as. is capable «,f preparin.z the fo«,,l f«,r a simple borne 
meal. The topk.s of the lesson may be presented 
follows : 
PREPARATION 
1. Sec flat the dining-r««m i. well aired and in order. 
. Sec thaf fhe linen is «leall and «arefullv launder.d. 
3. Sec fhat the glass, silver, and steel are poli»hed. 
4. Decide on the number to bc scrvcd. 



88 tlOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

ARRANGEMENT 
1. l'lace a silence eloth of felt, woollen, or thick cotton: 
(1) To prevent the di.hes from making a noise 
C_ } Te» giv«, the tabh' a Iwtter apl»carance 
(:I) "1',, l,resere the table top. 
"2. Lav the ch,th, l,lacilff the centre «,f the e]oth iii t]le 
centre «,f thc table and .preading it smooth]y, having 
its f«,lds i)arallel with the edges of the table. 
3. Arrange a eentre-pieee, usin£ a vase or I,asket of 
flowers, a slnall plant «,r a dish of fruit. 
-t. l'ut a plate at eaeh persou's place and lav the eutlerv 
and silvcr be.ide it ab«,ut ol,e illch frolll the ede of 
the rai,le, iii tht. order «,f ust.. th«,.e nsed first on the 
outside, or farthest from the ]date. At dillller t]lt.Sc 
1,1ate. are usuallv place, l I,ef,,l'e the olle who serve.% 
(1) l'lace the knives at the right side. with the sharp 
t.des t,,ward the plate. 
(2. Plave the f«,rk. at the left side. with the tines up. 
(3) Place the s«,l spoons at the right of the knife, 
bowl 
(4) Pla«.e the dcssert sp«,«,,,s in front «,ï the plates. 
the handle to the riht, the b«wl up. 
(5) Place the dessert forks with the ,,ther forks, or 
iii front of the plates with the dessert spoons. 
• 5. l'lave the water gla.se. at the clld ,,f the kldïe blades, 
top up. 
6. Place the bread and butter plates af Ihe h.ft of the 
forks. (These are no n.ecessary af dinner.) 
7. Plat.e the napkil,s af the left. ,catlv ï-hl,.d" discourage 
fancy folding. 



TABLE SETTING 89 

L I |  
! • 



90 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

s. Place the sait and pcpper so tbat they are eonvenient 
t,, eery one. 
!. l'lace the dishes that are to be served al table direct]y 
in front of the ont who is to sere them. 
lo. l'lace the ('arvilg set in front of thc host, and the 
tablcspoons as t,n page 9, or where food is to bc 
serve& 
11. l'lace a chair ïor eaeh person. 

Individual section of table laid for dinner 

TABLE MANNEP, S 

In Form III. the clfih|ren are too youngto serve af 
/al,le, sothe lesson on Preparing and Serving Meals, 
page 136. ha.¢ I)een rcserved for the work of Form IV, 
Junior Grade. The (.la.es should, howcver, be carefully 
trained in laide manners from the first. In their usual 
class work thi.¢ will 1)e inciden{ally taught. A re.»mflar 
lesson sllould include thc following: 



TABLE MANNERS 91 

RULES FOR CORRECT TABLE MANNERS 

Thcse are bascd upon the a«('¢,pted customs of wcll- 
brcd pcoplc, and have in vicw the convenience and coin- 
fort of all who are at the table. 

Thev mav he stated as follows: 
1. Stand behiml tbe scat assigned you. 
o.. Wait until tbe hostess is seated, before taking a seat. 
3. Sit natural]y erect, without any support from the 
ell«,ws, plaeing the feet on the floor. 
4. Do hot begin fo eat until othêrs are served. 
5. Eat and drink quietly, taking small mouthfuls; keep 
tlle mouth closed whi]c eating. 
6. Do hot drJnk wit]l food tu the mout]l. 
7. Do hot talk with food in thê mouth. 
8. Use a fork preferably, whenêver it will serve thê pur- 
pose; and nêver put a kniïe into the mouth. 
9. Takê soup froln the side of the spoon. 
1o. Wipe the mouth bêforê drinking from a glass. 
11. B,e atteldivê to thê neêds of othêrs. 
12. If it bê neeessary to leavê thê table, ask thê hostess to 
excuse you. 
13. If a guest for one meal only, ]eave thê napkin un- 
folded beside the plate. 
1. Never use a toothpick al thê table, or in any eompany. 
15. Watt for the hostêss fo rise, then stand, and replace 
the chair in position. 



('IIAprI'ER Y! 

FORM IV: JUNI()R GRADE 

THE KI'I'ç'II EX 

AT TIE 1)eginning of the year's work in Form IV, several 
lessons should be spcnt in reviewing the methods of 
«..«king and ..leaing taught in the previous 'ear. This 
mav be d.me bv reviewing former recipes and bv using 
new ones which require a knowledge of these meflod. 
As the pupils work, they should be closely observed, and, 
with.mt the tea«'her giing umlue assistance, their weak 
points should be «-arcful]v strcnTthened. The ]ength of 
rime spent on /he revicw will varv according to the abi]ity 
af the class. This can he plainly judged by their habits 
(f w[rk. The new recipes given them should be such as 
thcv are likelv to use at ]mme, so a to encourage home 
1,racti«e. Thcsc re«ipes will als[, eflar.ge their collection 
in their special rccipe books. Some of the fol]owing mav 
l»e uscful : creamcd potatoes, potato omelet, stuffed potatoes, 
tuffcd onions, corn oyters, baked tomatoes, spaghetti 
with tomato sauce, macaroni and cheese, scal]oped apples, 
ldain rice pudding, ginger pudding, sago pudding, tapioE.a 
cFeam. 

THE KITCHEX FIRE 

Up to this rime the pupils bave heen allowed fo manage 
their individual table stores or a gas range. They should 
now be îau.ht fo understand nd fo use an ordinary coal 
or wood rane. Two lesson. will he neeessarv for this pur- 
pose. After each lesson has been taught, the remainder 



THE KITCHEN FIRE 93 

of the period should l»e spent in se»me kind of practieal 
work whi,-h tan be a,.c,,mplished in the rime. Smne 
eookerv whieh requires «»n]y a few minutes nmy be re- 
viewed, such as tca, «.ocoa. coffce, toast, bacon, apple sauce; 
drawers and cupl»oards mav bc cleaned; silver and steel 
may bc p«dishc,1; ,lcsigns f,»r wall-paper, dishes, curtains, 
and drcss materials mav I.. drawn ; h,»uschohl a,.counts nmv 
be e.ml»uted ; ewin mav be finished. 

LESSON I 
EQUIRE.MI.:NT. (»F A KIT('IIEN FIRE 
In intr,du«.ing a lcsson «,n the kit,hen tire, ask the 
pupils te» imagine that they havc huilt a new h,»u.e, whieh 
the workmcn havc just vm.atcd, lb.fo»re they ean more 
in if must be cleaned. What ki, of water is be.t f, Jr 
clcaning? llot water. What is necessary t provide hot 
water? A tire. 
Find out fr,m the pul»ils and then write cm the black- 
board what is necessary f«»r a tire. What i.¢ the first re- 
qui.cite? S«»mcthing te» burn. What de, wc ca]l such a 
substance? Fuel. Where shall we put the fuel? In a 
store. Whv is a stve neccssarv? To confine the tire. 
Using a candle as fuel an« a lamp ,.himmv as a ste»ve, 
light the eandle and place it in the chimney. It l»urns 
only a sh«»rt tin/e and then dies out. Why? Becau:e the 
oxygen of the air in the ehimnev is all exhaustcd. Then 
what is am»ther rcquisite f«»r a tire? O.,ygen. 
Imagine the room fo be a store and thc ehairs, 
tal»les, etc., to be fuel. The air in the room a]so 
mueh oxygen, so that in this room we have three requisites 
for a tire. It is verv f«»rtnnate f«»r u. {hat somcthing cl.c 
is needed. We shall try te» find «»ut what it is. 



94 I-I OUSEI-I OLD MANAGEMENT 

Watch while I im}d these strips of paper over this 
lighIed gas store higb enough to be out of reach of the 
flame. What happem.d to tbem? They burst into a flame. 
Wbat di] tbe paper that I held receive tbat if did hot get 
when it was lyin .n the table? Ileat. We shall try a 
match in the saine way, also some rhin shavings. They 
a}so burn when thev receive hcat from tbe tire. Then 
wl,at is nimtbt.r rcquisitc for a tire? Heal. Naine ai} ,fthe 
rvtuisites for a kit«.]wn tire. Fuel, slore, o.rtj.lett, aud heal. 
Nm'E.Just here it is a good hing to impress the eare 
that is neeessary in regard to gasolene, eoal-oil, benzine, etc., 
or any substance that burns at a low temperature. Bring out 
the faet very elearly that it is the heat that makes fuel burn, 
that a flame is not neeessary. 

]I EAT 
Experiments to show on wbat the amount of heat 
required depend. : 
l. ]lcat t-gerber two strips of paper of the saine size 
but of different thiekuesses and observe whieh burns 
first. 
2. IIeat together a strip of verv rhin pomper ami a match 
which is much ihicker thau tbe paper, an,1 observe 
whieh burns fir.*t. 
3. P, ub a nm/ch vigorous]y cm some surface and observe 
tbe resu|t. 
f'one]usious.l. Tbe amouut «,f heat required fo make 
fuel burn depends on : 
(1 } Tbe thiekness of tbe fuel. 
(2) The substance e¢,mposingthe fuel 
2. Some substances bure, af a verv |.w temperature. 
NoTE.This will expIain the order of Iaying the fuel for a 
tire and the use of a match in lighting it. 



REQUIREMENTS OF' A KITCHEN FIRE 95 

OXYGEN 

Experiment. to show the means of ,,btai,inz oxyg,.n" 
"« *- eandle, set tbe ]amp ehimney over it and 
1." Lh a 
observe thê result. 

2. l',aise the chinmey bv supp,,rting if «,n two small 
pieces of voo«|. Note the rê.u|t. 
3. ('over the raised «himuev witb a pieee ¢,f «ardboarfl. 
Xote the result. 

Experiments to show the necessity for ox.gen 

Conclusions.--1. A fresh supply of oxygen is con- 
stantly rêquirêd. 

2. Two openings are required to ensure a constant 
supply of oxygen, one bélow the fuel and one above 
it. 

3. 0xygen is obtained from the surrounding air. 
4. The passage of air through these openings creates a 
draught. 



9, HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

I t will be necessarv next l,» ]ead the c|a¢s to see that 
lhe SUlqdy .f oxygen ,.an be e,,ntr,,lle,l: 
1. Bv the relation of the .penings: 
(1) Openins direetlv opposite eai other eau.e a 
rapid circulation of air or a "'dire,:t 
draught " 
() Indirect ope.i.,..,s cause a sh.,wer circulation af 
air or an "'indirect draught" 
o.. P,v a ero.¢. outrent -f air whivh temls t,, check the 
draught. 
FUELS 
A discussion «,f the fuels mav ext be taken. With 
pupils of F,rm l V if will hot he wi.,e fo o into too many 
dctail. regardig these. Besicles the c|assifi«ation of the 
«ommonest ones. they may be compared from the stand- 
points of cost. and of the rime and labour rcquired in their 

('lasses of Fuels: 
Liquid--coal-oil, ga.¢olene, aleohoI 
,%J]id--coal (coke), wo,,d (charcoal) 
(;aseous--natural ça.c. oJal 
N.TE.--Electricity is a means of producing heat, but cannot 
be called a fuel. 

THE KITCHEN STOVE 

LESSOX I1 

In developing the eonsru«ti«,n of a pra«tical coal or 
xood range, it is a g«od idea to use the hlack-l)oard and 
make a rough drawin t,» illustrate the details, a. thev are 



THE KITCHEN STOVE 97 

given by the pul)ils. Thesc details should be evolved from 
the knowledge gaincd in lhe pre«.eding lessons, a,l thc 
drawing should hot Ie an illustration of any parti«.ular 
store. 
After the be.t practical .tove, according fo the pupils' 
ideas, has been thought out and represented on the black- 
board, they should examine and criticise the st'hool range 
and the stores at ho,me. Thev arc thon r(.adv t,, I,e givcn 
the responsibility of managiug anv ordinary range. 

The following are the uecessary dctails to be consid- 
ercd rcgarding a kitchen stove: 
3latêrial.--(l) Iron, (2) stêêl 
Shape.-- 1 :ceta gu I a r. 
Compartmcnts.--(1) Fire-box, (2) a.qh-box, (3) oven, 
(4) passage f«r h,t air, (5) «.thcr c«ml»artmcnts if 
desired, such as watcr tank, warmin cl«sct, et('. 
Dampcrs.--(1) Front daml,er--I»clow the fuel, fo control 
the etrance «f oxygcn fothe fucl. (2) Oven damper 
--above the fuel af the entrance to the pipe, fo 
trol the heat for the oven, ami also fo control the 
draught. (3) Chec'k daml),_'r--at the front of the 
store al)ove the fuel, te» adroit a cross «.urrent of air 
to check the draught. 
Management of the store.--(1) l,ightinff the tire, (2) 
heating the ovên, (3) arranging for over night, (4) 
cleaning and tare. 
No'E.--OPenings below the level of the tire lncrease the 
draught, and those above the level check lt. 



98 ItOUSEHOLD MANAGEMINT 

A kitchen coal or wood range, showing, (a) oven damper open 

 B 

A kitchen coal or wood range, showing, (b) oven damper closed 



THE FIRELESS COOKER 99 

THE FIRELESS COOKER 
Throughout thc training given in IIou.ehold Manage- 
ment, thc teachSr should elnphasize the valuc of labour- 
saving devices and aids in the home. Ih»w fo economize 
time and energ 3" slmuhl bc a prominclt fcature of cvery 
practical lcsson. If rime permit, a lesson may be taken 
fo consider specially su('h aids as arc readily procurablc, 
Iii this lcsson the firclcss 

t«gethcr with their acl'agc cost. 
cooker is considcred. 

A fireless cooker 

The 1)rilwiplcs of the fireless eooker are based on a 
knowled,.-e of the laws governing the conduction and radia- 
tion of boat. For/his rca¢on, an elcmcn/ary science lesson 
relating fo thcse law. sh«,uld precede this lesson. Such a 
science lcsson is part of the regular grade work of Form 
IV. so if a spe«ialist tcaches the Household Management 
of that grade, she and tbe rcgular tca«her should arrange 
Go co-ordinate their lessons. 



100 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

PRIN('IPLES OF TIIE FIIIELE.'5. COOKER 

1. It furnishes no heat, but conserves the heat which 
i. in the food when itis put into the cooker. 
2. It conserves the heat in the food, by surrounding 
it with substances which are poor conductors of hcat. 
3. Extra heat may be given the food, after if is put in 
the cookcr, by placing heated stone plates above and below 
the dish that contains the food. The stone used for this 
iurpose must be a govd absorbent of heat. 

REASONg FOR TIIE UgE OF TIIE FIRELE..q COOKER 
1. It saves fuel and i.¢ therefore ct«,nomical. 
2. It saves time, I,ecau.e if requires no watehing, 
3. If conserves the flaxour of the food. 
4. It obviates ail danger of burning the food. 
5. It does hot hcat the room. 

WAS OF U-¢,ISG TIIE FIIIELESS COOKER 
1. Food cooked in liquid: 
In ail cookers wherc stone plates are not u.ed, only sueh 
fl,ods as are cooked in liquids tan be prepared. Examplês 
of ïood.¢ cooked in thi. wav are, meat soup, bêef-tea, meat 
stews, vegetables, fruit, porridge, eêrêal, puddings, etc. 
The prepared food is put into one of the food reeep- 
tacles hêlonginff to the cooker and is placed over a tire, 
until it bas hoilêd for a few minutes. Thê eovêr is then 
tight]y adjusted, and the dish quickly locked in the cooker, 
fo conserve the heat that the food and liquid have ab.¢orbed. 
2. Food cooked in drv heat by the use of stone plates: 
In this method the food is cold when if is placed in 
the cooker, and all the heat is supplied bv .tone plates 



THE FIRELESS COOKER 101 

plaeed al.ve and below file utellsil ctmtaining file tic.l. 
These plates are heated for about twenty minutes over a 
tire, before they are u:ed in the eo,ker. 
Exalnples of food eooked iii this wav are, r«»asts of 
meat; baked fruit, sueh as apples; bakcd vegetables, sueh 
as potatoes or beans; cakes, su«h as plain «.akc or fruit 
cake; quick bread, sueh as corn-bread an,l biscuits. 
3. Fotd eo.ked in liquid, aided by thc heat of «,ne stone 
plate : 
In ca.cs whcre the orignal heat 
is net suffit.lent to eomplete the c'ooking as desired, a heated 
stone plate may be placed in the co.ker bel.w the utensil 
eontainin the hot food. The .tone lnav be neeessarv for 
one of the folh,win reasons-- 
(1) Beeause the amount of f,od put into the eooker is 
too small te eontain nmeh heat. If is always better 
fo have the food nearly fill the dish. 
(2) Beeause the rime required is se h,ng that the heat of 
the food and liquid bec-mes exhausted before the 
eooking is eolnpleted. 
(3) Beeause it is desirable te finish the eooking in less 
rime. 

A HOME-MADE FIRELESS COOKER 
Use a large wooden box or a small trunk with a cl«,sc- 
fitting cover. Make it as air-tiht as possible by pastin 
thiek paper ail over the inside. 
Pack it level with clcan sawdust -r excolsi.r (the latter 
preferably), until just enough heiht is left te set in a 
eovered granite pail, which i.-: te be used for holding the 



102 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

food. Place the pail in the centre, so that its top cdge 
is just about hall an inch below the top of the box. Then 
pack in more excelsior very tightly around the pail, until 
level wlth if. This will shape thc " nest " for thc pail. 

A home-marie fireles« cooker 

Make a thick cu.hion, or mat, of excel.ior fo fit in the 
pace between the level of the e.xcelsior and the in.¢ide of the 
cover. ('over the cushion 'ith cheesecloth or denim fo 
keep if intact. 
NOTF..--Only food cooked in a liquid tan be prepared in a 
home-made cooker. 



('HAPTEII VI[ 

FOIIM IX': JUNI[)II (;IIAI}E (Continued) 

S'I"UI}Y {}F 

TIIE PVPILS hltvê been working with s(,me of the well- 
known foods in all of thoir re«ipes and should have a fair 
knowledge of how to prepare thcm iii simple wavs f.r the 
taille. If is now time f. them fo learn what the.e food.q 
eontain for thê use of their b.dies. Mueh of thi.q part 
of thê work ean he tauht in r,,m. with.ut special equip- 
ment. Ail earnest teaeher, with a few articles fr)m home, 
ean make the studv interesting and aluable. 
A series of le.s.ns will bê neees.qary for thi.q purpo.e. 
Thê amount of work » be taken at olle rime is sugêsted. 
but this .hould be judged hy the teaeher. As in other 
lessons on theory, thê remainin time of the lesson peri.d 
should t,e used in praetieal work. ,quetions 5,r .u«h 
praetieal work are given under the lesson on '" The Kitehen 
Firê", page 92. 
Praetiee lessons, to give varieIy aml sustain interest, 
should be interspersed between these lessons as desired. 

LESSON I 

USES OF FOOD 

The lesson mav he intr(,du«.ed hy a.king the «lass to 
think in what wav the h.dv .f a healthy bahy, who is fM 
regularly, wi]l have changed at the end of six months. If 
will be larger; if will have more flesh, more bone, more 
bair. etc. We want to get a naine that will apply fo any 



10t HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

l,art of the bodv. .No matter which part we examine 
through a micro.cope we final the saine fine and beautiful 
texture, and to this we give a naine similar to that given 
to finc. thin paper. We call it /i.xuehair tissue, bonc 
tissue, flesh tissue. 
Yhat has fl»od done fo the babv's tissues? It bas 
cnlarged its tissues; the child has grown larger. T» the 
enlargt«nent. «,r growth, of the tissues, we mav apply the 
t,rm, buihl, sngzestcd hv the huihling «,f a h,,use. Then 
what mav we sav food does for the tissm, s of the I)»ly? 
We mav sav that food buildx Ihc lixxue. of the body. 
Think «,f smne persms who have takeu fi»«»l every day, 
and ver as ]on,, as vou haxe known thcm thev have hot 
increased in size. What has f,od donc for their tissues? 
The clas» nmst be t,dd that the tissues «,four bodies wear 
out thr«mffh use. and that fl,od has furnished the material 
to replaee the worn-out part». What d» we say we are 
doin, fo ch»thes when we replace the worn parts? We are 
mendin or repairinff them. What does f,,od do f,,r our 
worn-out tissues? Food repairx lhe lix.'ues of lhe body. 
D, hot think anv more al«,ut the tissues 
Supp«,se you had n,,t hcen ahle b, get atv f«,,d f,r several 
day. In what way would v«u be diff¢rent from what you 
are now? You would hot be as stron. Food ffives 
strenh or enerffy hv beinff burned insidc the bodr. Thcre 
is a tire hurnin in out bodies all the rime we are alive, the 
fut.] bein« food. What do we require from the tire in out 
homes? We require heat. The rires iu our bodies give 
heat also. Anv tire gives off both heaf and ener'. State 
nother use ,f food fo the bodv. Food produces heat and 
ener#y in the body. 
But ft, cd d«es more for the bodv; if contains sub- 
stan«es fo keep out bodies in ordcr. Suppose the cock ffets 



STUDY OF FOOD 105 

ont of order and does ll«»t keep good rime, what ch»es Ihe 
watchmaker do te» it? fie r«.gulates it. That is what 
eerlain kinds of food do for us. What lhcn is an,ther ue 
of food ? l"ood regulale.s the body. 
Naine the nses of food to thê hodv. 
1. It builds the tissnes. 
2. It repairs the tissues. 
:l. It produces heat and energy. 
4. It rcgulafes fhe hody. 
ll,,w then tan we judge if a sui)stance 1)e a food ? Bv 
deciding that if perform one of these duties in the bodv. 

LESSON II 

The names of the sui,stance» in food which supply the 
material for the diflkrent uses of the bodv should I,e taken 
next. 
1. For building and rrl,uiring.--(1) Mineral matt,-r-- 
used large]y in hard tissues. (2) Nitrogenous 
mattcr, or protcinn»cd largely for flcsh. (3) 
Water--used in ail ti»sues. 
2. For fuel.--('arbonaceous mat/er (s/arch, sugar, fat). 
3. For regulaling.Minera] marrer, watcr. 
NOTE.The teacher should call attention to the tact that 
few foods contain all these substances, some have nearly all, 
some have only one, some two or more. In order to get ail, 
wo must eat a variety of foods. The class is now ready to 
consider the well-known foods, in order to find out which of 
these necessary substances each food contains, and to obtain 
a general idea of their comparative food values. 



106 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

SOURCES OF FOOD 
A]I nature supp]ies us with food. The three great 
divisions of nature are animal, vegetab}e, and minerai, and 
fr,,m ea«h we obtain food. thouh most ]argely from the 
animal and vegetable kingdoms. 
Animal f«,,»l is some part of an animal's body or some 
product of an animal: examl,lesmeat .r fish. milk, eggs. 
Vegetable food is some part of a plant" examples 
vegetables, fruit, seeds. 
Mineral food is some constituent of the earth's trust 
used aa food. This minerai food is obtained by drinking 
water whieh in eoursing through the earth bas absorbed 
certain minerals, hv eating plauts whi«h have ahsorled the 
minerals from the soi], or bv eating animal food whieh was 
built from plant food. 
This preliminary survev of t]e sources of ail our food 
gives the pupils a I,asis for c]assifyinz the foods with whieh 
thev are familiar. They mav be ziven exereises in doing 
this, and wi]l lot onlv find then interesting, but most use- 
fui as nature studv. 

STUDY F TtlE 'M.MON F[))DS 

In heginning the analvsis of the comm,,n fl,od.-:, it must 
be remembered that the pupils have no kuowledge of 
ehemistry, and that what is found in eaeh food must be 
diseovered throuh the sênses (.eeing, smelling, tasting, 
feeling), or through a process of reasoninz. 
The pupils should also feel quite sure of what they are 
setting out fo do; thev are going fo examine some par- 
tieular, well-known food, fo final which of the necessary 



STUDY OF MILK 107 

food substa»ccs if contains. The food substances for 
which thcy are looking are water," mineral marrer, 
llitrogcnous matter, and carbonaceous marrer (sugar, 
starch, fat). 
It is better fo I-,rovide each pupil with a saml,le of the 
f.od t,, l,e studied, l,u/whcre conditions make this difficult, 
• the one used by the tcacher will suffiee. 

STUDY OF MILK 

LES80N [ 

COMPOSITION 
5[ilk is the i,est fo«l fo examine first, be«ausê it con- 
tains ail the food elements except stareh and beeause these 
can be easily found. 
The pupils may each be asked fo bring a hall cup of 
milk from home. It mav be allowed fo stand in glasses 
while other work is taken. 
When ready for the lesson, ask the pupils to look af 
thc contents of the glass, and thev ill observe a difference 
of colour where the cream has risen. Nature itself bas 
divided the milk ilffO two parts. P,,ur off the top part 
and feel if. If féels greasy. Butter is ruade from tbis 
part. We have found fat--a carbonaceous food. 
More the milk around in the glass and let the pupils 
sec that if is a liquid. Tell them that ail liquid in a 
natural food is mostlv water. We have, therefore, another 
food substa,lce--water, a builder and r%o-ulator. 
Let the pupils compare a glass of water with a gla.s 
of skimrned rnilk, and they sec that something is dissolved 
in the water of the milk, giving if the white colour. Show 



105 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

[he., a glass of sour miik. whêrc ti,e white sub:tance is 
scparaie fr,,m tl,c water. iet Ihê nan,es curd an«l whev. 
Tell thcm h,,w the ,'heesemaker separafes sweet milk int,, 
curd ami whey. If adisal,le, let them doit. hut in any 
case short- them s,,me sveet miik separatcd hv rennet. 
Exami.c the sweet wiwv. It fastes svect, denoting the 
presenee of slgaran(ther earb«naee«us 
Notice the greenish-yeliow colour. Recall this saine 
e-lour in watcr in whi(.h potatoes, cal,bage, or other vege- 
tables hae I,een co.ked. T,il the i,upiis that this c(,h,ur 
is gicn I,v mineral malter bcing dissolved in the water. 
There is still the «urd of milk to examine. The use of 
the senses d,,ês hot aliow us t. definitelv dêi-ide what f,»od 
sui,stance the curdis. Tcll the 1,upils it i protein, or find 
the naine l,v a 1,r,,çess «,f reas,,ning, thus: Iccall the faet 
that I,al,ic lie f«,r several m,,nths ,,n milk al-ne and dur- 
in that tiret, huild ail tissucs ,,f thc b.v. Milk. thcrefore, 
must ««,ntain ail tisu,.-I,uihling sul,stanees. Rcview the 
f,«,,l ubstan«es whieh arc w,-essarv t,-, huihl ail body 
tissuesminerai matter, pr,,tei, ami watcr. We bave 
f,,und the minerai marrer and water in milk, hut hot the 
l,r,,tein. Sin««. rural is thc onh" rt.maining part of milk, 
it must I,c largely pro,rein. 
T«.ll th«. pul,ils that the scum whieh cornes ,,n the t.,p 
«,f milk. when it is boiled, is another kind ¢,f l,rotein of 
which there is a small amount in s,,luti,m in milk. 
Lead the pupils fo see that if stareh were prescrit, it 
would be in a raw ferre, and in this form is indigèstible. 



STUDY OF MILK 109 

I.ESSON" l [ 

Jq}ol V t.LUE 
The analvsis of milk gives a key fo thc food value of 
milk and each of its by-products (crcam, butter, butter- 
milk. sour milk. skim milk, «.urd. whcy. cheesc, junkct). 
These mav now I»e I»ricflv discusscd as t» t«»mposition, h,,] 
value, and cost. 
CRE 
Milk readilv al»sorbs o&»urs, l»a.toria, etc.. and should 
I»c kcpt iu covered, sterilized dihes iu a pure, co,,1 
atmospbere. 
EFFECT OF IIET 
Experimeuts sbould ho ruade t,, show the effe,.t ,,f 
simmering and boiling temperatures. To save rime. a 
different experimeut nmv 1,e giron to each pupil, and tbe 
results reported. 
1. Simmer sweet milk and uote the flavour. 
. Boil sweet milk and note the flavour. 
3. Simmer the curd of milk. Examine its texture. 
4. Boil tbe curd of milk. Examine its texture and con,- 
pare if with the sinm]ered cur,1. 
5. Boil skim milk and n,,te the scum. 
6. Simmer skim milk and n-te tho al,senee of scum. 
NOTE.From the above experiments de4uce the effect of 
heat on protein. 
Practice lessons mav now 1,e giv«.n in preparinff simplo 
disbes in wbich milk is tbe main ingredient, or. at least. 
recipes mav 1,e given 5,r thee t,, ho ma,h. at h,,me. The 
following would I,c suital,le: cr(.am sauce. «roam s,ups, 
custard, junket, cottage cbeese, albuminized milk. 



110 I-IOUSEHOLD blANAGEhlENT 

STUDY OF EGGS 

Lssor [ 

PA I,*TS 

(I} Shcll, (2} thi,k m«ubrane. (:;) white, (4} thin 
membrane, (.5} volk. 
Thcse parts are casily sccn. Attention sh«uld bc callcd 
to thc pores in the shell, and it sh,»uhl be explained that 
thesc allow the entrance of Iactcri«t whi«h sl»il the 
Any means of .losing these p«wcs hclps te» prescrve thc egg. 

METIIoD. OF PREnERVING 
Cover the holcs iia the shc]l as 5,1h,ws- 
]. Pack in salt. bran, sawdust, brine, or water-glass. 
2. ('oat the sbells with fat or wax. 
3. Wrap the e.._««« in paper. 

Testing eggs by floating: 
{l) slightly stale, (2) stale, (3) very stale 

TESTS 
1. In the shell: 
After an e,.z is laid. the liquid whi[.h it eontains begins 
fo evaporate throu.gh the p-res of the shcll and, as 
this continues, a noticeable spaee is left inside. 



STUDY OF EGS 111 

(1) .qhake the egg, holdig if near the ear. If the 
contents rattle, if is somewhat stale. 
(?) I)rop the egg in cold water. If it sinks, if is fresh. 
(3) tIold the egg between your eye and the light. If 
.ler. if is fresh. 
(4) A r(»ugh apl»earauee of the shell donc»tes freshness. 
2. Out of the shell: 
White--this sh.uhl be .lcar and cling t«) the yolk. 
Yolk--this sh.uld rould u 1) likc a ball. 

CARE 

1. If e-«. are to he used in the near future, thev 
should he washed aml put in a pure, c«)«,I atm«»sl,hcre. 
The lower shelf of the refrigerat«,r 
and eggs readily ahsorb thcse. 
2. If eggs arc to he prescrved, thcy should hot 
wa.¢hed unlcss their condition c«,ml)el. it, as washin;z re- 
modes the natural c.verig «»f the p.re.¢. Th«..v sh«»uld ho 
storêd in a (.lean, c,,(,1 l,Ia«.¢', ad 1,a«-ked as soo as possible. 

LES.O. Il 

t()MPf)sITION 

It is wiser fo develop the f,»(,d suhstances tu an e.,_,ghv 
reasonin., rathor than hv examifing the dift'êret part. 
The shell is hot used for foc»d, so it is the eontents that 
should be studicd. The ela.s should be guided in the 
folIowing .¢equenee of thouht: 
:I. An egg is desined hy nature to hecome a ehicke, so 
it must contain ail of the sub.tances necessarv fo 
build a chicken. 



112 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

2. A «.hicken is cm animal, and ail animal I,odies ar,, 
madc of [he saine sui,s/al,c.e,s. "l'l,,.s«. ¢«, have sc«.n 
fo I,e mineral ma/ter, profein, a,d wa[er. 
3. An e,,' therefore contains these three substances. 
• t. An e'g mus/ also confain three weeks' food for the 
chicken. Oerefore mus/ bave fuel food as we]l. 
This fuel f,,od is f,,und in /he yolk, in Oie form of 
fat. 
5. The v,,lk fleref,re contains wa/er, minerai mat/er, 
l, rotein, and fa/. 
ri. Thê white contains water, mineral mat/er, a,d 
protein. 

EFFEçT f)F HEAT ON EGGS 
The following experiments will show the effet./ on both 
volk and 'llite of the usual mêthods of apl,lying heat fo 
1. Boil an egg for flree mi»utes and note the effect. 
. B,,i] an egg for twentv minutes and note the effect. 
3. Put an e,,«,., in I,oiling water, remove from the tire, 
and let it .tand co ered from eight fo ten minutes. 
4. Fry an egg and note fhe effeet. 
No,,--The eggs may be put to boil and simmer at the 
beginning of the lesson, and pupils designated to take them 
from the heat at proper rimes. The eggs will then be ready 
to examine when required. 

COCLU.ION'S 
1. Boi]ing an egg for three minu/es does not a]low rime 
for the heat fo reach the yo]k. The white is hard 
and tough just next the shel], but soft and liquid 
as if approaches the yo]k. 



STUDY OF EGGS 113 

~.» Boiling an e¢,«« for twentv, minutes hardens and 
toughens the white, so that it all becomes hard fo 
dissolve or digest. If also gives the heat rime to 
reach thc ccntrê and llardcns thc yolk, but does not 
toughen if -r makc if hard te» diss.lvc or dist. 

3. Allowing the egg fo stand in thc hot water 
thc white te, a jclly-likc ,.o,,siste,,«.y without t«,ugh- 
ening if; if als,, co,,ks thc .v,,Ik. 

LI':SsoN,¢; ]I1, IV, .:'rc. 

U,SES (F I.'.GGR 
To give practi«c in preparin. %». and h, sh,w their 
spe('ial ues the f,,lh,wing dishes woul,I bc suitable: 
1. White : 
For f.od--loachcd eggs on t,,ast, simlncrcd e7g 
For cohesive (sticky) propcrty--potato halls, fish 
halls 
F(r clearin liquid--coffee 
For holding air--foamy omelet 
For de«-rafion--hard-hoiled eggs cul in fam.v 
shapes for garnishing, meringue on lemon pud- 
ding, etc. 

2. Yolk : 
For food--egg-nog, scrambled eggs 
For thickening ]iquids---custard, sa]ad dressing, 
]emon pud«l i n.g 
For colouring foods--tapio«a cream 
For decoration--hard boiled and gratcd over salads. 



114 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEhIENT 

STUDY OF VEGETABLE FOOD 
Beforê beginning this part of the work. it would be 
mo.¢t helpful if the class had one or two nature study 
lessons on the structure and organs of plants. With the 
lmpils in possessio of some knowledge thus a««luired, the 
ll,usch,ld Mana.,_,'(«nent tca[-hcr has onlv to h.ad up to 
ideas .f thc prcparation and value «,f thcse parts as food. 
These ideas sh,,uhI, as far as l.,ssil,lc, fl:lh,w in such a 
mural .rdcr that the lmpils nmy ecn mticipate the 
Thê outline may be as f[,lh,ws: 

LESSON 1[ 

Ail voetabk, fo«,d i obtaincd from plants; if s some 
pari of a plant u.ed as f(md. 

PARTS OF PI.ANT. USED A. FOOD 
1. Root--carrot. radish 
2. Tuberp«xtato, artichokc 
3. Bulboni,n 
4. Stcmrhubarl). asparagus 
3. L«.af--sl)inach" (-ahhage 
6. Flowereaulifl[,wer 
;. Fruitapple. orange 
S. Set, d--(1) Of trees (]mts)heechnut, almond 
() () Vasses (eereals)--whet, eorn, riee 
(3) Of vine (legumes)pea, 1)eans, lentils. 

In askin. for examples «,f the different parts, there will 
l)e more inerest and alue if the questions eorrelate othêr 



STUDY OF VEGETABLE FOOD 115 

subjects, for instance: For what fruit is Canada noted? 
What fruit does she import? Name a nut the squirrels 
gather. 
LEsso II 

COMPOSITION OF ANY PAItT OF A PLANT 
From theforegoing the lmpils nlav inter that there 
are eight diffcrent foods to studv. They should be led to 
sec that in realitv there is onlv one, as all parts of plants 
are. geuerally speaking, the salue in structure. Referring 
t. the animal bod 
foot is of much the saine structure as «»ne froln the face; 
that a piece of fie»h ïrom the leg is Ihe salue as a piece 
from anv other part of the hodv. In the saule wav. if we 
studv one part of a plant, it will be a type of all parts. 
In general the structure is as ïol]ows: 
1. A framework, in cellular tortu, ruade of a substance 
called cellulose. 
2. Matcrial filling the cells: 
(1) A juice in the cells of ail parts of plants 
except seeds 
(2) A s«»lid in the cells of seeds. 

Tt, show the framework..ome rejetable food having 
a white colour should be choscn, such as potato, parsnip, 
or apple. 
If must be explained that all plants are ruade of a 
framework of numerou. cells, something like a honev- 
eomb. The cells ili plants are of manv different shapes, 
according fo the plant, or thc part of the plant, in which 
thev are found. Thev are u.¢uallv so small that thev tan- 
hot be distino-uished without a microscope: but occasion- 



116 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

allv they are large enough to be seen without one. Pass 
seetion. of orange or lemon, where the eells are visible. 
:qake a drawing on the blaek-board of the eellular forma- 
tion of a potato. Lead the elass t, understand that, in 
every case, the eell walls mu.t be broken fo get out the 
eell contents. T,» illu.¢trate this, they may use potatoes, 
and break the cêll wall. hy grating the potatoês. After 
they have broken up the framework, the cell contents 

Cellular structure of a potato 

.lmuld be .trained thruh cheesecloth int a glas,. Thev 
bave nt, w two parts fo examinecell walI. and cell con- 
tents. 
\Va.h the framework t- free if of an)" eell juice and 
stndv if first. {-ive it. naine, and note its co!our and 
texture. Compare the framework of potatoe., straw- 
berries, lt, ttuce, trees, etc. Tell the class tha in some 
ca.es part of the cellulose is so flbrous that if i. u.ed fo 
make thread, cloth, or twine: for instance, flax and hcmp. 



STUDY OF VEGETABLE FOOD: POTATO 117 

Celhflose is most difficult fo dissolve, so that pra«.tically 
little of if is digested. It serres a mechanical purpose in 
the digestive tract by helping fo fill the organs and dilutc 
the real food. If fibrous, it acts as an irritant and over- 
COlneS sluggishness of the intestines known as constipa- 
tion. The outer coats of (.ereals are ail example of eoarse 
cellulose, as used in browu bread and some kinds of 
porridge. 
Examine next the juice whicb was eontained in thc 
cells of the potato. Tlae liquid shows lnuch water; the 
colour indi(.ates mieral matter in solution: the odour 
suggests a flavour; the white sediment is starch. 

('OMI'OSITION OF POTATO JUI('E 
Watcr, mineral marrer, flavouring marrer, starch. 
Draw attention to the tact that thc potato is the part 
of the plant which acts as a storchouse. In such parts, 
starch is a]wavs fould as the stored f,rln of suzr ; but, in 
parts whi«.h are hot storchouses, sugar will be found in its 
stead. In rare cases b-th arc fould, as in the parsnip. 
NoTE.--This is a good rime to impress the tact that plants 
are the source of starch for manufacturing purposes. In Eng- 
land, potatoes are largely used; in Canada, corn. It wil! be 
interesting to state that the early settlers obtained their 
starch for laundry purposes at home from potatoes, by chop- 
ping or grinding them. 

The inso]ubility of starch in eo]d liquids mav be effee- 
tively reviewed at this part of the lesson. The starch has 
been lying in the water of the potato oeils for several 
rnonths, yet has not dissolved. Let two or three of the 
«]ass gradually heat the l)otat«» jui«.e with its starch sedi- 
ment, stirring ail the rime to distribute the sedimcnt evenly. 



11 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

"l'h¢.y will final that a little less than boiling temperature 
diss,,lxes the starch. This will sh.w them that heat is 
necessarv for the solution of starch, and a heat nmch 
greater than that in the l,ody, hence raw starch is indiges- 
tible, lS«.all rite lnilk less,m aud the uselessness of star«-h 
as a «omponent of ntilk, unless the milk be cooked. 
Squeeze the jui«e fr.m a s,ur apple ,r lem,n, and note 
tl,e tast«.. Explail, that ail fruit jui«-es c.-main more or 
l«,ss acid. The effçJ«.ts ,,f this a<.id in the b,dy are similar 
t,, th,se ,,f minerai mattcr. 
Protein is also found in plant juices: hut in such small 
quantities that if luay be disrearded as a source of food 
supply. 
GENEIAL «'OMP«ITION OF PLANT JUI<'E 
Water: mi]eral mattt.r: flav«,uring matter: starch or 
sugar, or both: a,'i,1 (in fruit juice}. 

LE.ox III 

COMI'O.ITIoN OF .OLID MATEI;IAL IN CELLS OF SEEDS 
This part of thc lcss«,ll may be deveh,ped as follows: 
1. Seeds contain the l,uilding material for new plants, 
a well as their food f, a short rime. 
2. ]'latlts and aninlals r,.quirc much the saine material 
to build and fec,1 them. 
3. Animals require water, mineral marrer, protein, 
sugar, starch, and fat. 
4. Plants require the saine: but the seed bein a store- 
bouse part of the plant, if will nof have sugar, 
and water has fo be supplied when tle new plant 
is fo be formed. 



FOOD VALUES OF PARTS OF PLANTS 119 

5. Seeds contain, thereft, re, minerai matter, protein. 
stareh, and fat. 
No'r 1.--Seeds will grow in water until their stored food 
ls used: they must then be planted in soil, to get further 
nourishment. 
NOTE 2.--The two fuel foods, starch and fat, are hot round 
together in abundance in seeds; one or the other will be much 
in excess. For instance, in walnuts there is a great deal of 
fat, while in peas and beans there is scarcely a trace of fat, 
but the starch is abundant. 

('OMPARATIVE F(}OI} VALUE OF I}IFFERENT I'.t.ITS (}F I'Lt.NTS 

Onlv a vcrv geueral idea of this sllouhl be atteluptcd. 
The fo«,d value of anv part of a plaut eau I»e r.ughly esti- 
mated by cousidering the oee of that 1,articular part in 
plant structure. Nature studv will assist lu this. The 
ro, l c«llects the fi,,,d t,, seud if t« the parts ab«ve ; the stem 
is a hallwav through which the f,,od is carried iii a more 
diluted tortu. The leaves serve thê purpose of luug» an,l 
will not contain ranch f«,,«l, tlmugh th«v naturallv have a 
good deal of flavour" parsley, saze, and tea are exalnples 
of this. The fruit is a ho,use h, protect flic seeds, and is 
ruade most attractive and deli«i,us, se» that auimals will 
I,e tempted to car this part. and thus assist in the dispersal 
of the seeds. The fruit has ç«,mparatively little f,,«l value 
as Imihlinzmaterial. The eed e,,ntaiu the st«»red ma- 
terial fo buihl new plaufs, aud theref,,re is the me,et nutri- 
tive part of ail. It is the only part of the l,lant which con- 
tains an appreeiable supply «»f huilding f,»od, that is. whieh 
can take the place of egs or meat iu the diet. Baked 
beans are sometimes ealled " nuggets of nourishment " or 
"fhe poor man's beef ". 



120 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

LESSON IV 

After discus»ing the food value of the different parts 
in this broad way, the l)upils mav be asked to consider the 
plant food.,_ used in their diet and to compare their nutri- 
tive value. 

The facts coneerning these mav be summed up as 
follows : 
1. Green vegetables: 
These generally contain nmch watcr, hardlv any 
protein or fat, and a sma]l amount of sugar. 
They arc valualde mainlv for their minerai 
matter and eellul.se. 

2. Root x egetables and tubers: 
These are more nutritiou., than green vegetables, 
be(.ause they contain much more sugar and 
starch. 

3. I,'ipe seeds (eereals, lcgumes, and nuts) : 
These are highly nutritious, because of the large 
amount of protein and building minerai matter 
thev contain, and also the amount f fuel food. 

DRIED VEGETABLES AND FRUIT 

It is important that the alue of these be pointed out. 
Dried foods contain all of the eonstituents of freh food 
exeêpting water and a little flavour lo.¢t in evaporation. 
yet thev are often much cheaper. Attention should be 
directed to the best means .f restoring the water and, if 
ne¢.essary, .f giving an additional flavour by the use of 
cloves, cinnamon, etc. 



COOKING VEGETABLE FOOD 121 

Canning is a better means of preserving food for 
export or for use when out of season, but where the eXl»ense 
prohibits this method, drying is a g,..l substitute. In 
districts where fruit aM vegetahles cannot be grown or in 
seasons when thcv cammt I,e obtained fresh, the dried 
forms are cheap and have excellent food value. 

THE COOKING OF VEGETt.BLE F«»OD 

As vegetable food i. eaten both raw and cooked, the 
pupils sh-uld be asked t,, decide whcu c(«ki.g is uecessary 
and what they wish if to aecomplish. 

There are only two substances in vegeta.ble food which 
will require cooking, aud these are: 
1. Cellulose, if it be hard or tough 
2. Stareh, if it be present. 
The pupils have ïound in their experiment with the 
potato wCer, that starch cooks quickly, hence the rime of 
cooking will depend altogethcr on the texture of the cellu- 
lo.e. When the celluh,se is sot'tened af the centre, the last 
part which the heat reaches, the xegetablc or fruit will be 
cooked. 
If the food is eooked in water bv boiling or simmering, 
much of the sui)stance will pas.* into the cookig water. 
As the ell walls beeome softened, thev allow the eell con- 
teurs fo partially pass out and the cooking water fo pas. in 
fo fill the spaee. If the food is long in eooking, the water 
may have more value than the vegetalde, and it should hot 
be thrown away. If mav be used in two wavs--as a basis 
for a sauce or a soup. 



1"2"2 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

GENERAL RULES FOR COOKING VEGETABLES 
NoTE.--As the principles in the general rules bave beer 
taught, theso rules may ho dictated to tho class. 

PI:EPARATION 
l. Wash. pare, peel. or serap, the vcgetable, aild eut it 
into convenient sizes. 
2. Unless green vegetables art' freshlv gathered, soak 
them i ««dd waWr f,r an h.ur I»efore 
3. Soak dried vegetalde. at least twehe hr»urs. 

COOKING 
:I. Put all vegetables on to cook in b,]]ing water, except 
dried vegtab|es, which .hou]d be put ou in cold 
water. 
2. Strong-.qme]ling vegetables should be cooked af sim- 
mering point, the ,thers nmy boil gcnt]y. 
3. For vegetablcs that grow above ground (including 
oni«ms, salt the water (one tsp. t. a quart). 
4. For undcrgrouml vegctablês, do m»t sait the watcr. 

VEGETABLE RECIPE 
Prepare and «o«»k file vegetaldes until tender, accord- 
ing fo the rules given above. Drain off and mcasure the 
vegetable water. For cach ½ cup of vegetahle, fake ¼ cup 
of the water and make into a sauce. Re-heat the vegetal)le 
in fhe sauce and serve iii a hot di.h. 
NOTE 1.--For potatoes and tomatoes do hOt follow this 
reeipe. 
NOTE 2.--The sauce is marie by thickening each cup of 
vegetable water with two tablespoonfuls of flour, and season- 
ing as desired with sait, pepper, and butter. 
NoF 3.--Another method of saving and using the valuable 
vegetable water is to rnake it into a soup. 



COOKING FRUIT 12 

GENERAL RULES FOR COOKING FRUIT 

FRESI[ FRUIT 

1. Stewed.--Put the prepared fruit in a saueepan with 
enough water to keep it fr.m burninz. Cover 
.],,st.ly. and stew unti] temh.r, stirril oft,.n. Ad,l 
the suar ami h.t the mixture }»«»i] a illinUtO nl,,1-e. 

2. I',,,,ked in s.vrup.--Make a .<.vrup ,,f ,,le 1,art su:zar 
fo two or three parts water. Put the prêpare,1 
fruit in the hot syrup, cover ch,se]y, and simuler 
until tender. 

DRIED FRUIT 

Wa.«h the fruit thor.u,]lly, l'over with «vld water 
and s«,ak twentv-fl,ur hours. Put on t,, «o.k in tbe saine 
rator in whieb it has soaked. Add spiees if de:ired. 
('6ver e]o.elv and simmer until tender. Add the su:zar 
and sinlmer ten minutes longer. Take out the fruit, and, 
if neeessary, boil d.wn the syrup, then pour it oer the 
fruit. 
IEssONS V, V], ETc. 
While studyin£ vegêtab]e food, praetiee wi]l be given 
in nearly every lesson in the preparation and eooking of 
vegetables or fruit, but after the completion of this series 
of lessons, these food. sllould be prepared and eooked with 
more intelliêlwe and interest. Vor this reason, there mav 
he, at the }ast, c,ne general practieal le:son dev«,ted fo 
vegetables and fruit, fo review and impre.s the faets that 
have heen tauht. As potatoes, on accourir of thêir lare 
amount of starch, reqnire .peeial eare, an era lesson 
may be given to this vegetahle. 



124 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

In the lcsson on potatoes the attention of the c]ass 
.qmuld be directed te the ïollowing: 

POINTS IX COOKING POTATOES 
1. Be sure te soften the cellulose thoroughly. 
2. After the potatoes are cooked, get rid of all possible 
moisture, that they mav be white and mealv. 
(1} If potatoes are cooked in water, drain them thor- 
oughly, remove the eover, and shake over the heat 
te drv out the starch. 
(?) If potat,es are I,aked, i,reak the skins and alh,w the 
moisture te es«ape as steam. 
3. When serving mashed l»«,tat«,es, pile them lightly 
without .¢moothinz. 
USE OF STARCH TO THICKEN LIQUIDS 
A lesson on the u.e of starch for thickeninz purposes 
should be ffiven I,efore lessons on the nlakin,. «,f a sauce 
«,r a soup frein thc ater in which vé..éta »les hare been 
eookéd. Thé necéssity oï separating the stareh grains 
should be shown bv experiment:. 

EXPEI[IMENT.q IN U.ING .TAP,('II Ff)P, TtlICKENIXG 
(Any powdered starch may be used) 
l. Boil ¼ cup of water in a small saucepan. While boil- 
ing, .¢tir into it ½ tsp. of cornstarch and let if boil 
one minute. Observe thc re,ult. Break open a 
lump and examine if, 
2. Mix 1 t.¢p. of cornstarch with 2 tsp. of cold water, and 
stir into ¼ cup of boilin._-, water. Œ%te the resu]t. 
3. Mix I tsp. of corn.¢tarch with 2 t.¢p. of sugar and .¢tir 
into ¼ cup of boiling water. Note the re.¢ult. 



BASIC RECIPE FOR THICKENED LIQUIDS 125 
4. Mix 1 tsp. of cornstarch with 2 tsp. of melted fat in a 
small saucepan and stir into it  cup of boiling 
water. Note the resu}t. 

CONCLUSIONS BA.ED OX TtIE FOREGOIXO, EXPEIII.IENT.q 
1. Starch granules mu.t be separated before i)êing u.ed 
fo thicken a liquid : 
(1) By a,lding a double quantity of cohl liqui,1 
(21 By addinz a double quantity ,,ï suar 
(3) Bv adding a d,,uldê quantity «,f melte,l fat. 
2. The liquid whieh is being thiekenM must bê eonstantlv 
stirred, t,» distributê evenly tho star«h grains until 
they are cooked. 

BASIC REI'IPE FOR LtQUIDq TIIII'KENED WITII FLOUII. 
Milk Flour Butter 
Thin erealn sauce .... 1 eup 1 tbsp. 1 th:p. 
Thick erealn sauce ... 1 eup 2 tl,sp. 2 th:p. 

NOTE.--Use thick cream sauce to pour over a food. Use 
rhin cream sauce when solid food substance is mixed with 
the sauce. 

VARIATIONS OF BLIC I;ECIPE 
1. Tomato sauce.--Ir.e strailwd tmnat«, juiee instea,1 «,f 
milk. 
2. Vegetahle sauce.--Use vegetable water iii plm'e ,,f the 
nlilk. 
.3. Cheee auee.--Use  fo I eup of grated eheese in 1 cup 
of thiok eream sauce. 



126 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

('REAM OF VEGETABLE SOUPS 
Al lea.l one pracli(-e lesson should be givên on the 
making of these soups. The value of thc egetablc water 
should be impressed upon thc Irai)ils, and it mav be poiuted 
,ut that these soups are an excellent way of using thc 
.ooking watcr and any left-over vegetable. 
Thc differcut, e bctwecn tomatoes aml other vegetables 
shouhl be noted. Tmmtoes arc a fruit and, as such, con- 
tain an acid. The aeid wouhl ourdie mi]k and must be 
ncutralize,1 by the use «,f soda. },ef,,re milk «an be added. 

Utensils used for cream soups 

PRINCIPLE.q OF CREA]I SOUPS 

l. Thê liquid mav I,e ail milk. part vegtable water and 
mi]k. or ail vegetal)le water. 
2. The amount of flour uced for thiekenin._ depends on the 
vegtable. tar«qv vegetables need only  tbsp. to 
ouo CUl-, of liqllid ; mm-star(.hv veetahle nee,1 l tbsp. 
to a «up. 
3. The inffedients are eomhined as follows: 
1 ) The liquid is heatcd an,1 thi(.kened with flour. 
(2) The soasonins <,f butter, salt, and pepper are 
added. 



COOKING SEEDS 127 

(3) Thc xegetable pull» is added in anv desil't.d 
quantity, usually about two tbsp. t,, O,le cup ,,f 
liquid. 
A Sl,e(.ial recil,e sh«,uld I,e giron for cream t,f t,,lnat,, 
soup, s, that the proportion of s,,,la mav bc correct. 
NOTE.--If flavour of onion, bay-leaf, parsley, etc., are 
desired, these should be cooked with the vegetables, so as to 
be extraeted in the vegetable water. 

OUTLINE OF LESSONS ON COOKING SEEDS 
('I.:IIE.IL. : W IIEAT, OAT.'4, «'ORN'. I;I«'E, ]:YE, B.RLEY 
1. Forms in which used: 
(|) 
««,arse oatlneal, etc. 
{2) ([ranular--e«rn mea]. cream «,f whcat, fine aat- 
meal. etc. 
(3) P.»llcd or flaked tzrains--wheaL oats, 
rice, etc. 
P,)wdered--wheat flur, ricc fl,,ur, etc. 

() 
2. Cooking cercals for breakfast : 

For 1 cup of water use I tsp. of salt and the follow- 
ing eereal-- 
Wh.le or craeked--Œ eup of «ereal 
flranular--3 ri,si,..f eercal 
l/,,lled «,r flak¢.,1---. eup ,,f «.ereal. 
Put sait and water in the inner part of a «l«,ul,le boiler, 
and set directly over the tire. When steaming hot. gradu- 
ally stir in the dry cereal, and keep stirring until the 
starch has thickened and boiled. Stir carefully, so as hot 
te, break the flakes ,,f r,,lh',l cereals. Thcn set the imper 



128 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

dish inside I]le outer part of the double boiler, in which 
flmre should be i»oiling water, and cook from two fo four 
]lours. 

NOTE 1.--Rice has very tender cellulose and cooks in  hr. 
NOTE 2.--Rolled or flaked cereals bave been steamed an 
hour or more to soften them for rolling, so require less cook- 
ing. 
NOT 3.--Cereals may be cooked for breakfast the day 
before, but should ot be stirred u'hile beinfl re-heated. 

LEGUIES: PEAS, BEANS» LENTILS 
1. Forms in which u.ed : 
(1) ]tipe seeds 
(?) Meals--pca meal, etc. 
2. ('ookiug af dried legume.¢: 
(1) ,%,ak in col,l, soft water for tweh'e hour. or 
more, and tben drain and rinse, liard 
water ma S be softened by boiling, or by lhè 
addition of soda ( lsp. of soda o 1 pt. of 
water). 
(?) ('o,,k by .f»merfng in s«,ftened water until 
thev are soft. 
(3'1 After sinmmring, the beans mav be baked. 

NUTS 
Forms in whieh used: 
1. Wh,,h, or brokel nuts--used a. dessert or in eakes, 
salads, etc. 
. Butters--groun,1 and mi,ced with «,ther ingredients 
t,) make a paste. 
3. Meals--grmmd and used fo thieken soups. 



SALADS 129 

SALADS 
The series of lessons on vegetablc foods being finished, 
it is a good time to take a salad lcsson. All salads werc 
originally ruade from fresh young 1)lants or salad greens, 
and though any food material is now used f,,r the 1,urI,,,se, 
tbe subject seems fo follow naturally the lessons on plant 
food. 
The pupils shouhl derive unu.ual pleasure from this 
work. OEhe dis/les ruade are most attra,.tive and aPl»«.tizhff  
besides affording an opI,ortunity ft, r eaeh member of the 
elass fo display individual artistie skill. Xone of the prin- 
(.iples are new, so that the lesson will be really a review. 
The outline of notes for tbe class will be: 

INGREDIENTS {,F SALAD.q 

1. Salad plants l,rOl,er, such as lettuce, water-cress, 
eelery, cabbage 
2. Cooked vegetables, such as peas, beans, asparagu.% 
carrots, beets 
3. Meat--co]d, of an S kind 
4. Fish--cold. of any kind 
5. Egghard-boiled 
6. Fruit 
7. ('ombinatioDs (,f the al,ove in great variety. 

F(OD VALI'I':S OF SALADS 

This depcnds on the ingredients. If sala,l greens only 
are used, the food value is mainly the mineral marrer, but 
the dish will be refreshing and appetizing, and the oil, 
butter, or egg used in the dressing adds nufriment. 
Salads are prepared with littlc trouble and with no 
cxpense for fuel. 



130 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

PREPAR ,TION OF ALAI) INGREDIENTS 
l. l[ave everyflfing cold hcfore combining. 
2. Freshen the grecns in cold water until crisp. 
3. Meat. fish. and solid ingredients should be seasoned 
se,me rime hef«,re using, se, that thev may abs, rb the 
flavours of the seasoning. 
4. In me,st «.ases d,, n«,t coml,i,e the in7redients with 
thc dressing uutil just before serving. 
(1) Sa]ad greens.Wash thorouh]y, and put in 
cold water until crisp, drain on a towel, wrap 
in a dam cloth, and put iu a cool place. Cab- 
bage and lettuce may be finely shredded. 
(2) Fruit and c«,oked vegetables.--('ut into cubes or 
suitable pieces. ('hill and mix with the dress- 
ing, fo absorb if. 
(3) 3Ioat.]h«uove the fat, skin, and grist]e. Cut 
in cul»es and chill. 
(4) Fish.--Rêm-ve the hones, flake, chill, and pour 
dre»sing over" but do hot mix. 

DREgSIXGS FOR SALADS 

1. Cooked salad dressing: 
": tl,st,, su,,,ar 
• . isp. mt, stard 
 tsp. sait 

(1) 

 «-up inegar 
2 tbsp. butter. 
Mix tlJe first four ingredients in a saucepan and 
heat until disso|ved. 

(2) Beat the eggs verv light in a round-bottomed bocal. 
usine, a I)over e_.% beater. 
(3} Boat the vinegar mixture into the eggs. 



STUDY OF MINERAL FOOD 131 

(4) Set the bowl. with ifs contents, over a dish of boil- 
ing water, then beat slowly an] conAantly until 
tle mixture is thiekened. 
(5) Lift the l,ow] fr.m the heat al once. 
(6) Beat in the butter and set awav t,» («»«,1. 
(7) If desired, a half cup of whiI,IW,1 ,»r plain ,.ream 
may I», a,lde,l just I»cfi,re the dressing is used. 
2. Uncooked salad dressing: 
 tsp. sait 4 tl,sp, olive off 
 tsp. pepper 2 tbsp. vinegar. 
(l) Stir the salt and pepper into the oil. 
(2) Add the v]negar sh,wly ami stir vigorously until 
wel] blended and s]ihtly thickened. 
(3) Serve with any salad ruade ,f salad grecns. 

STUDY OF IIINERAL FOOD 
As the study of lnineral food involves a kw,wlede of 
chemistry, ]ittle me,re tan he «l«,le in .luni«,r clan»es than 
fo teach that certain mineral t«,lnl,ounds are required for 
the body, io I,oint out their tw«, main ues. and to lea,l 
the ])upils to kllow the f««,ds which gcnerally sul,ply these. 
Their attention sh.uld be directed fo the fact that all 
minoral mattcr is f.nd, in the first phw«. i th«. .ar/h's 
trust, hut that. with the excepti.n of sait, animais 
use it in that form. Plants ean ue if, and thev al,sorh 
if from the soil: then we eat the plants, and in that way 
oblain the mineral substance, or we may «,btain it by 
eatin the animais whieh bave ea[en the plants. Water 
also, in makinz ifs way through the earth, mav dissolve 
certain minerals and, 1,v drinking the water, we obtain 
hese. 



132 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

It will hot be neeessary to teach the names of the 
minerals wbich our food must supply, as most of these 
will rot.an n,,tbing t, tb. pupils. Tbev miht be asked 
t,, naine one or two which are very familiar; for instance, 
the lime in bone and the irm in blood. They may be 
t,,l,1 that there are a few others wbich they will learn 
when they study chemistrv in the high school. 
The l, Ul, i]s bave alrea,lv learned that minerai matter 
serres two main functions in the I»,ly: that is, building 
and regtlolbg, and it is a g,od plan to classify the well- 
kn«,wn f«,,,ds under thcse two headins. With a little 
gui,lance the pupi]s can ,lo most of this for thcmselves. 
They know that milk serres ail building purposes in a 
chih]'s b,,dy, and must, therefore, contain minerai matter. 
Egs build animal b«,dies, an,1 must (.ontain this sub- 
stance aiso. Mcat i rbe animal bodv that bas been buiit, 
thcef, re meat has this suhtance; but we shall find in he 
meat less,,ns that there is n,, minerai matter in fat and 
that tbe c,,,,k cannot dissolve it out of bone. therefore 
muscle or lean meat must be catch fo obtain it. Seeds, 
t,o. c,mtain huildin.u material for new plants; therefore, 
the bui]dinZ mineral matter must be stored in their oeils. 
liard water is kn,»wn hv tbe lime it contains, therefore 
this. if drunk, asists in the formation of bone. 
The class must be told that the minerai in the juicçs 
,,f plants is mainlv fi,r reulstin purp,»se»: that is. to 
keep out bodies in «,rder. ,r as we say. bealthv. Wben 
thev zet out of order, we usually go fo a doctor fo be 
regulate,l or ma,le well. The medicine which he pre- 
scribes often contains some minerai in solution, perhaps 
iron. The mineral matter which is in the juices of plants, 
heing a me, re natural form flmn the minerai matter in 
the medi«inc, is m,,re easilv ma,le use of iq the bodily 



DIET 133 

processes. This is one reason why people should eat 
plenty of vegetablcs and fruit. 
Many springs also furnish water with large quantities 
of mineral matter in solution, which is used main]y f,,r 
medicinal purposes. The pupils may know some places 
where we find su(.h sprilgs, and these shouhl ],c n|ell- 
tioned, such as Preston Springs, Banff, and M,mlt 
('lemens, which have become health resorts thr,,ugh the 
l)resence of these waters. When the springs are in a 
distant country and their waters arc known fo contain a 
certain minerai which our bodies need, the water is 
bottled and shipped to us, and mav be oltaim.d from a 
druggist. }/unyadi Janos, A1)ellta, Vi('hy, and Ap.llinaris 
are well-known medicinal waters shil)ped from Europcall 
springs. 
SUMMARY OF SOURCES OF MINERAL FOODS 
1. Building minerai matter.--Milk, e«,.%=¢._ lean meat, 
seeds, hard water 
2. Regulating mineral matter.--Fruit, vegetables, minerai 
waters, salt. 
NoT.--This classification will be most useful to tho pupils 
in preparing well-balanced meals in their diet lessons. 

DIET 

After studying in this elementary way the composi- 
tion of the animal and vegetable f-ods, the pupils will be 
ready for simple lessons on diet. The cla.¢. ma3" now be 
said to have a working knowledge of tle well-known foods, 
and they should be given a chance fo use this knowledge, 
by combining and serving these foods for simple meals. 
lO H.M. 



134 

HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 
REFERENCE TABLES OF FOOD CONSTITUENTS 

It will I,e helpful in this work, to guide the pupils in 
making out a referenee table of the food eonstituents. 
Tbis will give lists of food in whieh eaeh constituent pre- 
d,,minates, as follows: 

1. Water : 
Beveraes (water, milk, tea, coffee, eocoa), fruit, 
vêgetables. 
2. Minerai matter : 
(1) For building--milk, eggs (yolk and white), 
lean meat or fish, seeds, hard water 
(2) For regulating--fruit, vegetables, mineral 
waters. 
" l'rotein" 
Milk (eurd), eggs (yolk and white), lean meat or 
fish, seeds. 
4. Nu,,ar" 
Fruit (juk), non-starehy egetables (juiee), 
milk (whey), commercial sugar. 
. S'tareh : 
l'arts of plant. whieh serre a. storehuuses: 
Tubers--potatoes, artiehokes 
Iloots--parsnip, tapioca, arrowroot 
Stem--sago 
Seeds--cereals, legumes, some nuis (peanuts, 
chestnuts). 

6. Fat : 

Milk («reanl), egg-yolk, ment or fish (fat), 
fruit, as the olive (oil), most nuts (walnut, 
butternut, pecan, peanut, etc.). 



REFERENCE TABLE OF FOOD CONSTITUENTS 135 

Besides the necessary substances in food, the pupils 
must be told that there are othcr points fl,r the house- 
kceper fo consider when preparing the meals, namely: 
1. The am-unt -f ca«.h f..d sui,stance rcquired dailv. 
2. Spc('ial rcquircmcnt. of individual. a«.«.ording to: (1) 
age, (2) occupati.n, (3) climate, (4) scason. 

Under 1, al»ove, it may be explaincd, that when a meal 
is prepared which gives the body a eorrect l-,r.portion 
ea¢'h fo.d sui»stance, it is said t- he well I,alanced. From 
numerous experiments the " Dietary Standard" for one 
dav for a grown person bas been calculated to 
Waterabout 5 l, ints, two of which are taken in solid 
food 
hlineral matterl ounee 
Protein3 to 4 ounces 
Fat--2 ounces 
Sugar and starch (together)--14 fo 18 ounces. 

Although the pupils cannot be expected fo follow this 
table accurately, from lack of sulïicient knowledge, it will 
be of some assistance fo them in choosing a c«,mbinati.n 
of food for the home meals. 
Under 2, above, some .f the variationg of food are 
.l»vi.us. but SOIIIe must he taught. I'hildren require 
simple, nourishin fo.d. whieh will ct,ntain plenty 
protein and mineral matter fl,r tissue building as well as 
nmeh fuel food. Their diet should be varied and 
ahundant. 
In old age the diet sh,,uld also be Siml,le , he¢.ause of 
the lack of vigour in the digestive organs, but the amount 
of building material should be decreased. The food of 



136 ttOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

chi pe«,ple shouhl c«mtaiJ proportionately more carbon- 
aceous nlateriai. 
Brain workers require less food than those engaged 
la active muscular work, and it shouhl be less stimulating 
and less bulkv. Their diet sh[,uhl be in a form that is 
e«,sily digested. 
With the fi,regoing general ideas in mind, the pupils 
may be asked to prepare menus for simple home meals. 
These shouhl be assigned as hoe work, so that plenty 
«»f time ean be given fo their c.nsideration, and then they 
may be brought te, the elass f-r eritieism. The best of 
these should be ch,sen for actual practice in sehool vork. 
NOTE.It is intended that this part of the work shall be 
presented in a very rudimentary way. The teacher should 
feel satisfied if she succeeds in implanting ideas of the 
importance of these food considerations, so that the pupils 
will be ready for more specific instruction to be gained in 
higher schools or from their own reading. Cheap bulletins 
on Human Nutrition, published by Cornell çniversity, will 
be excellent reading on this subject. 

I'ItEPA[tlN( AND .';EIU'IXG MEALS 

Before the pupils are given a m,.al to prepare and 
serve, table setting should be reviewed, and the rules of 
table service taught as follows: 

RULES FOR SERVING 

1. The hostess serres the soup. saIad, dessert, tea, and 
«offee" the host serres the meat and fish. 
2. Vegetables and side dishes mav be served b S some one 
at the table or passed i,v the waitress. 
3. Dishes are serred af the left of each person, commencing 
with the chief ,naest. 



RULES FOR SERVING 137 

4. Guests are scrv(,d tïrst; ladies beforc g(.ntlcmen. 
5. In ea«'h course, renmve the dishes 
I»efl»re removing the soiled plates. 
6. Whcn one course is finished, take the trav in the h'ft 
han,1, stand on the left side of the pers.m, and re- 
more the individual s.iled dishes with the riht hand, 
never piling them. 
7. Before dessert is served, if necessary, rclnove the 
crumbs from the eloth with a brush, crulnl» knife, or 
napkilL 
8. Tea ,,r c,,lïee may I,,. p,,ured at tahh, ,,r served from a 
side table I»v the waitress. 
NoT..--Extra eutlery and napklns should ho eonveniently 
plaeed on a side table, in case of accident. 

Where the class consists of twelve or more pupils, it 
must be divided for the I,reparation and .erving of a meal. 
Eaeh section should prepare and serve a meal for the 
others, until ail have had exl»erienee. As I,reakfast and 
lulwheon are the simpler meals, they sh«»uhl be taken first 
in the order of les.ons. The duties «,f thê eooking and 
serring should be definite]y settled, and eaell girl giên 
entire responsibility for a certain part of the work. 
Those who are served should represent a familv. 
Members shouhl be ehosen fo aet as father, mother, lady 
guest, gentleman guest, and ehildren of varying ages, so 
that the duties and serving of eaeh may be typified. 



('tIAPTER VIII 

FORM IV: 3UNIç)R GRADE (Continued) 

(ARE (tF TIIE IIOUSE 

"l'ttE rrœfl.. of Form IV Junior should be urged to take 
entire eare -f their own bed-rooms. The IIousehold 
Managemt.ut teacher t'an d. much to encourage them in 
this. She mav include such work as pa of the week's 
praetice. 
The order of w«rk shou]d he discussed and planned by 
the pupils, the teacher idin the c]ass l)y her ques- 
ti.nin 7. In les»ons of this kind. the main work of the 
tea«her is to ascertain what the pupil knows and fo 
svstematize ber kn.wledze. 
A t)ewritten sheet of directions mav be given ead 
l,upil to bang in h«r r,),,m, and mav serve as an incentive 
,, her t,, perf.rm the duties outlined. 

DIRECTIONS FOR THE DAILY CARE OF A BED-ROOM 

l. Open the window, if if has been ('h,sed during dressing. 
9. Throw the be(]-clothin over the fo«,t of the bed, using 
a chair to hod if fr,m the flo,r, or place if (»ver two 
ehairs near the window. 
3. Put night clothin.c to air. 
4. Put awav anv other «|,thing i drawers and (.1,set.. 
5. Tidv and dust the t, I, of the dressing-tabh,. 
6. Make the bed. after it has been aired at |east hall an 
h t»ur. , 
138 



DIRECTIONS FOR WEEKLY SWEEPING, 139 

Once a week the following work slmuhl be added" 
1. The blankets and comforter sh(,uld Ire hung tmtside fo 
air. 
2. The mattress should be turned, and fresh bed-linen 
placed on the bed. 
3. The room should be thoroughly swept and dusted. 
After the pupils have had training in the care of their 
bed-rooms, this experience, together with their lessons 
in cleaning, shouhl enable them fo keep any of the other 
roons in the house in good order. 
It should be pointed out that, in these days of sanitary 
building and furnishing, there is no necessity for the 
semi-almual housecleanm= of former times. Each 
week the bouse can be thoroughly gone over, with the 
exception of laundering curtains and washing wood-work, 
and these duties might be taken in turn, a room at a rime 
every week, so that the work will n,-,t accumulate. 
The class should be faught fo consider fhe economy of 
ime and energy and eneouraged to provide themselves 
wilh ail the lafest aids fhey ean aff«)rd. 
The cleaningmefhods which are necessarv for this 
work and which bave not been formally taught, shoul,l 
now be deniely outlined. These are the weekly sweeping, 
weekly dusfing, and eleaning special metals. 

DIRECTIONS FOR WEEKLY SWEEPING 

1. Dust and put away all small articles. 
2. Lift the small rugs, sweep them on both sides, out-of- 
doors if possible, and leave fhem o air. P, ugs foo 
large to ake out should be brusbed and folded over 
fo allow of sweeping fhe under side and wiping tbc 
f[oor beneafb. 



140 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

3. Cover the furniture wilh dust sheets. 
4. Shut the doors and open a window. 
5. Begin af the side of the room farthest from the door 
and sweep toward the centre; sweep from the other 
side toward the centre; gather the dust in a dust- 

pari and elnpty it into the garbage pail or tire. 
6. Put away the broom and dust-pan. 

7. Leae the room shut up for a few minutes, in order 
t, allow the dust to settle. 
S. Use a "" dustless" mop fo dust the tir»or. 

DIRECTIONS FOR WEEKLY DUSTING 
1. Ue a .oft cotton or cheesecl«»th duster verv slighfly 
dampened. 
?. Roll up the covers that are over the furniture and carry 
flem outside, in order fo shake off the dust. 
3. Wipe the dust fr,m the furniture, pictures, whdow- 
si]ls, ]edges, doors, and baseboard, being careful hot 
fo scattr it in the air. 
t. Change the du:ter when necessary. 
5. F, eplace the small articles. 
6. Wash and drv the du.ters. 

CARE AND CLEANING OF METALS 

IRON  OR .TEEL 
Utensils ruade of these are heavy, but strong and 
durable, and ho]d the heat well. 
1. ('are : 
They must be kept dry and smooth. Moisture 
eau.ces rust, rou.uhens the surfaces of the 



CARE AND CLEANING OF METALS 141 

ulensils, alld makes them Inc»re ditticult 1o 
elean. If they are hOt fo, be used f«,r some 
rime, the surfaces shouhl be greased or coated 
with paratïï». 
2. Cleaning : 
(1) Wash in hot soap-suds, rinse in hot watêr, and 
dry thoroughly. 
(2) If food is burned on, scour with some gritty 
material or b,il iii a solution «tf washing soda, 
rinse iii hot water, and dry thoroughly. 

TIN 
Uten.iIs ruade of this are light and inexpensive; they 
are good conductors of heat, but they are also good 
radators and lose heat quickly. 
1. Care : 
As tinware is .steel or iron coate,1 with liquid 
tin, the grades vary according to the '" base- 
metal " used and the thickness of the coating. 
l'tensils ruade of tbis metal nmst be carefully 
kept from scratches, since deep scratehes expose 
the base-ruerai and allow the f,,rnmtion of ru.t. 
2. Cleaning: 
(1) Wash in hot soap-suds, rinse, and dry thoroughly. 
(2) If food is burned on, boil in a weak solution of 
washin soda, rinse in hot waer, and dry 
thoroughly. 
NoT.--Whlting may be used to brighten the tin, but 
scourlng la hot recoramended, as it wears off the coating. 



14- ° HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

GRANITE AND ENAIEL WARE 
Utensils ruade of this are attractive, hot heavy and 
they do hot tarnish or rust. 

('are : 

These wares are ruade by eoating steel or sheet- 
iron with a specially prepared lassy substànce 
ca|led ename| or laze. Two or thrce coats arc 
applied. The durability depends on the 
redients used in the glaze and m the number 
of coats appIied. 
Such utensils should be heated gradually, scraped 
carcfully, and hand|ed without knocking, fo 
avoid " chipping" 
('leanin : 
(l) Wa.h in hot soap-suds. 
(2) If stained, use s,me scouring powder; wash and 
drv. 
(3) If food is 1,urned on, boil in a solution of washing 
soda and then seour ; wash and dry. 

hL['.M IX'II'M 

Utensils ruade of this are very light in weight and, as 
thev bave no crevice.% are easily cleaned. They are also 
good conduclors of heat. 

1. Care : 

This metal warp. under a high temperature, and 
should, therefore, be used with care. Do not 
turn the gas on full. or. if used over wood or 
coal rires, be sure lo ]eave the store lid on. 
S,me food. injure lhe meta], if thev are allowed 
t. remain in it verv long. 



CARE AND CLEANING OF METALS 143 

leamn : 
(1) Wash in Ii«»t water, with mihl soap. AIkalies 
should not be used. as they darken fl,e surface. 
(2) If food is 1,urned on, the dish should bê soaked 
iJ, water and then scoured with bath-brick or 
emery powder. 
(3) Whiting may be used to hrighten it. 

ZINC 
This is ne»t. used for utcnsils, but f,r fable t«,ps and 
for placing under stores, etc. 
Cleaning : 
(1) Use hot water and mild soap. Alkalics and acids 
affect zinc ad shouhl I,ê u.ed with carc. 
(9.) If stained, rub with coal-oil or a pas/e ruade of 
coal-(,il and soda, and then wash iii hot water. 

GALVANIZED 1RON 
This is used for garl)age pails, ash pans, store pipes, 
etc. It is ruade by dipping sheet-iron into melted zinc. 
Cleaning : 
The saine as for zinc. 

COPPEIt OR BRASS 
Utensils ruade of these are heavy but durable and are 
good comlu(.tor. of heat. They are dangerous, if hot 
properly cleaned. 
Cleaning : 
(1) Wash in hot water, u.ing a little washin soda to 
remove any grease, rinse well, and dry. 
(2) If stained or tarnished, seour with sait and 
vinegar, then rinse thoroughly, a,,l dry. 



144 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

I 

This is used for spoons, knives, forks, and serving 
dishes, but never for cooking utensils, on account of 
ce»st. Itis ihe best conductor of heat among the house 
motal.. 

('leaning : 
(1) Wash in hot soap-suds. 
(2) If stained or tarnished, use whiting or silver 
polish, wa.,:h, and dry. 

RECIPE F[»R .qlLVER I'OLISt[ 
2 thsp. 1,orax 
1 cup boilinz water 
½ CUl, alcohol 
whitivg. 
1. Dissolvc thc borax iii ihe water. 
2. When e,ld, Md the ah'.h-1 and enough whiting fo 
make a thin eream. 
a. B«dtle, and shake whcn used, 
NoTE.--Tho caro and cleaning of the mutais out of whlch 
ordinary utensils are ruade, such as gran|te ware. tin, and 
steel, may bo taught Incidentally as the utensils are used 



CIIAP'I'EI IX 

F()RM IX" ,IUNI()R t;ILXDE (C,mtinued) 

LAUNI)IY XXOIK 
THt.s WORK iS but a «.«»ntinuatiol of the lessolns on clealn- 
ing. If is the 1)r«,'ess of removing 5,reign marrer fr«,m 
e«,tto,, linon, u'oMlcn, or silk fabri«s bv the use of u'at,?r 
aud additional clcansing agents. If als,, includcs thc 
finishi»g «,f thcse matcrials hv the use t,f I,lucilng, starch. 
and heated irons, to rcst,,rc as far as 1,,ssib]c their origi,al 
al)l)earance. 
The prin(.iples «,f laundrv work bave been taught in 
the ashing of disln cl«hs and towels, and now these 
principles 1,ae OldV to be extended to white cotton and 
linen clothes of anv kind. 
The pupils mav be asked te) bring soi]ed articles of 
white linen or cotton from haine for u.e at school in 
exemplifyin the necessarv processes. Ii schools which 
lack an equipment, these proces.¢es mav be discussed in 
class and then practised af home. The teaeher should 
ehoose from the f,Alowing outline what is most suitable 
to the class: 

OUTLINE OF LESSONS ON THE WASHING OF 
WHITE COTTON AND LINEN CLOTHES 

LESSON I 

%IATERIALS 
1. Water : 
(1) Use: 
(a) To soften ad dissoh-e certain foreign sub- 
stances in the clothes. 
145 



146 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(b) To carry away ail the foreign marrer that 
]pas I,een dissolved or rubbed out of the 
clothes. 

(2} Kilds : 
(a} liard t,'aler 
( b ) ,"ofl cater 
For laundry purposes, the water should 
be soft. The qua]ity known as hardness, 
whicll some water has. is due to the lime 
which it bas dissolved in making its way 
through the earth. 
Watcr is said to I»c temporarily or per- 
manentlv hard a(.cording to the kind of 
lime it bas in s-lution. Temporarily liard 
water mav be softened by boi]ing; the lime 
will he depositcd, as mav he seen in the 
"furring" of tea-kettles. Boiling bas no 
effect in softenig permanently hard water, 
so a sui»stance kmwn as an alkali is used for 
this purpo.e. 
(3) 5I,thods of .«,ft¢,ni)g water hv alkalies.For 
each ga]lon of water use one of the fol- 
lowing : 
(a) One tab]espoonfu] of borax or ammonia dis- 
solved in one cup of water. 
(b) Two taldespoonfuls of a }olution ruade bv 
dissolving c, ne pound of washing soda in 
one quart of hoiling water. 
(c) One fourth tab]espoonful of lye dissolved in 
one cup ,,f water. 



LAUNDRY WORK 147 

2. Alkalies (borax, ammonia, washing soda, lye) : 
(1) Use: 
(a) Te» soften hard water 
(b) To assist in dissolving greasy substances. 
(2) Kinds : 
(a) Borax.--This alkali i. oue ,f the mihle.t, 
and for this rcason i. le.s harmful t- tlw 
clothin. It i. u.eI'ul wheu an alkali i 
required fo soften water for eoloured 
('h,thes or woolleus. It als, has a tendcncy 
fo keep white elothes a god eo]our. 
(b) Ammoia.This als«, is a mihl alkali, but i. 
apt fo "vellow'' white materials. As if 
is verv volatile, it sh,,uhl ll«»t he us(.d 
unless the washing tan bc «lole qui(.kly. 
(c) ll'ashing soda.oEhis is a «.hca[, suhstau(.e 
and stronger than borax or amnmnia. It 
should be ruade into a solution bef[re it 
is used, for fear of tc, o great strength. 
(d) Lye. or caustic soda.--']'his alkali i. vcry 
strong and shouhl [»e employed with great 
('are. It must not be u.ed except in weak 
solutious, otherwise if would entirelv di.- 
.olve fabrics. ]t is hot advisable for 
home laundry work. 
3. Soap : 
(1) Use.--To a('t on gkeasy marrer. 
S«,ap-suds l)enetrate fa[»rics more completely 
than water alolm, and when the soap 
('ornes in contact with fatty material, if 
emul«ifies it,. that is, ery fincly divides 
it into minute particles, so that it cal, he 
easily rcmoved. If a soap is used that 



14 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

contains free a|kali, this substance unites 
with the grca.y impurities te» form new 
soap which has c]eansing value. 
(2) Kinds.(a) Neutra], (b) n]cdiulu, (t') strong. 
Ail soap is a c-mpould of an alkali and fat, 
and acçording as one or the other of these 
su]»stallcVS predominates, the kind of soap 
is determined. 
V]]en just enough a]ka]i is used fo com- 
plcte]y .,«po»ify thc am«,unt of fat, tbe 
pr«)du.t is callcd a ncutral, «r mild, soal). 
When an excess of a]kali is present, the 
soap is termed medium or strong, 
according to the anlount of free alkali it 
contain.. 
A mild soap should be u.e«l when fre 
alkali would be injurios, as in washing 
voollens or fabries that have delieate 
eolours. 

4. Soap substitutes, or adjuncts: 
(1) Use.To aet alone or with soap in exertng a 
,,lvent action on greasy impurities, so 
that the cleansing process may be 
facilitated. 
(2) Kinds : 
() Alkalie,.--These must be used in excess of 
le amount needed for softening the water. 
(b} Hardie.us soh'ent.% .«ucl . 
paraf]ïn, coal-oil, ga.qolee.--The (-lothinv 
must be well rinsed fo get rid of any 
odour. 



LAUNDRY WORK 149 

(c) Washing pou'ders.--These are prepared mix- 
tures of soap and some other solvent of 
greasy matter. 
5. Blueing : 
(1) Use.--To inake clotlles which hae a yell,,w 
tinge appear whiter in colour. 

(2) Kinds.--There are several kinds on" the market, 
but the names of tbese will be of no value 
to the class. 
NoTE.--Suffieient blueing should be used to rnake the 
blueing water a pale sky-blue eolour when a little of it is 
lifted in the hand. 

6 Starch : 
() U.e: 
(a) To stiffcn fabrics and t]luS improve their 
appearance. 
(b) T« give fabrics a glazed surface, so that 
tlley will shed dust and other impurities. 

(2) Kinds.--(a) Cold starch, [b} boi]ed starc/l. 
I{aw starch does hot give as durable a finish 
as eooked starch, but it does give greater 
stiffness. A fabric will take up moe 
sfarch in the raw form. and the heat of 
the iron cooks t]le sfarch, thus producing 
file stiffness. The "body", or stiffness, 
produced by cooked starch is usuall.y 
preferable, though on account of its pre- 
paration, it is hot so ¢6nvenient fo use. 

11 H.M. 



150 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(3) I¢ecipes for starch-- 
(ai (',,ld Starch 
2 tbsl), laundry starch 
- tsp. borax 
2 eups eold water. 
Dissohe the borax in a little b.iling water. Add the 
'old water gradua]ly to the stareh and mix tboroughl,v. 
Add the dissolved borax and stir well before using. 
(b) Boiled Starch 
2 tbsp. stareh } tsp. lard, butter, or paraflïn 
4 tbsp. co]d water 1 qt. boiling water. 
Mix the star,.h .with the «old water until free from 
lumps. Add the lard, then gradually stir in the boiling 
water, and keep stirring until thickened. Cook fifteen 
minutes and use hot. 
NoT.--Borax in starch gives greater gloss and increases 
the stiffness. It also gives more lasting stiffness. Lard, 
butter, or wax is used to give a smoother finish and to pre- 
vent the starch from sticking to the iron. 

LESSON | | 

PREPARATION FOR WASII[NC, WIIITE LINEN 
OR COTTOX CLOTHES 
l. Sort the clothes : (1) 
() 
(3) 
2. Mend the clotbes. 
o. h'emove stains. 
4. Look after necessary materials. 

Tahle linen and clean towels 
Bcd and bodv linen 
l[andkerchiefs 
Soiled towels and cloths. 



LAUNDRY WORK 151 

PROCESS OF WASI[IXG WHITE 
OR COTTOX ('LOTIIES 
Steps Melh od 
1. Soaklng : 
Wet the clothes: rub the s«,iled part with soap and 
roll ea(-h article separately; i,;wk in a iub. placing 
the clothing me,st s.iled at thc I,«,tt,mt- (.i,ver with 
WflFlll soapy water an soak frofl oo hotr to oyer 
night. 
The s«»aking s-fteus ad l«»«»sens the fil»res of fahries, 
s,, that the forein matter in them ean I»e more 
easily separated. It also dissolves the soluble im- 
purities in tbe fabries. 
2. Rubbing" 
Wring the c]othes ont «,f the soaking water, and place 
theln in a tub of clean warm water or soal,-suds; 
rul, tho s,,il«d parts first on one side and then on 
tire other, uing the knuckles, a washhoard, or a 
washing-luaehilw. When each piece is clean, wring 
it tightly. 
The rubbing serai»es or rul,s «,ut the f«,reign matter 
whieh bas been loosened l,y the s,,aking. 
3. insing : 
Shake out each piece and put it in,, a tub of e]ear 
water; tub. and more al,,ut in the water to get 
rid of any soi]ed water that the clothes may con- 
tain; wl'ill tigbtly. 
4. Boiling" 
Shake out each pieee and plwe it in a boiler of eold 
water with or without soap" brin te; b,iling heat. 
and l,oil briskly f,,r twenty minute. 
Tbe boiling kills any germs and assists in whitening 
the elothes. 



152 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

llinsing: 
l,ift the ch,thes from the boiling water by means of 
a ch,lhes stick and place tbem in a tub of clear, 
«.old water ; proceed as in the first rinsing. 

6. Blueing : 
()pen out each piece and place one or two at a rime 
in a tub of I)lueing water for just a moment; 
wring tightly, and shake out eaeh pieee. 
The blucin tends te» eounteraet any yellow tinge in 
the elothes, making them appear whiter. 

7. Starehing : 
Dip c,ne piece at a time into the stareh mixture until 
well saturated; tht.n wrin. 
lnlv certain arti«.]cs «»r ]»arts of articles wilt require 
this l,art «,f tlw pr«,cess, te» gie them body or stiff- 
ness and, if may be, glossiness. 

8. IIanging : 
Shake out each pieee thoroughly; fasten to a clothes- 
line or hand- on a raek to allow the moisture to 
êaporate. This sbould be out-of-doors in the sun- 
ligbt if possible. 

REMOVAL OF STAINS 

Forein matter whieh i. diltleult or impossible fo 
remove bv the ordinarv wasbin proeess is ealled a Main. 
Sueh marrer is hot dissolved by the usual eleansing agents 
used in laun,lry work, such as watêr and soap, but requires 
some spêeial solvent fo aet on if. The eboiee of the agent 
to be used will depend on the nature of the foreign marrer 
to be removed. In some cases it is diffieult fo find 



LAUNDRY WORK 153 

an agent which will ],,,t a,-t als,» ,,n thc eolour «,f the 
fabric: in other cases t,» find «,ne u'hi«h d,es hot injure 
the fibre of 
The pupils should be asked fo give insfances from 
their own exl,erien,.e where Sl)e('ial s,»lvens were used fo 
remove stains, and be required fo make a list of these. 
If neeessary, the teaeher should supplement this list with 
flte names of «dher agents and the mcth.ds «,f usin lhcm. 

OUTLINE OF LESSONS ON THE WASHING OF WOOLLENS 
Thc washing of woollen matcrials is part of thc Course 
f.r the work of the Scnior Grade of F»rm IX', I»uf, f»r the 
sake «»f conveniencc, thc laundrv lessons of Itofl iradcs of 
F.rm IV are outlined in one section «tf this Manual. 
Before allowing the class any praefice in this branch of 
]aundrx" u'ork, it x-ill be necessary for le teacher fo make 
certain principles very clcar: 

1. That 'ool is an animal produet. As such if tends fo 
1,e shrunken and hardem'd I,v (1) heat. (2) alkalies. 

2. That the surface of eaeh wool fil)re woven into woollen 
materials is seen under the rnicr,,scope t,, be eovered 
with notches, or scales. If these notches in anv way 
become entanled, thê material is therebv drawn up, 
or « shrllnken » 

3. That these notehes nmv be entangh'd by: 
(1) Wettin£ the woollen material and then ruhbing 
or twisting if. When the fibres are wct, they 
expand somewbat and the projectin seales, or 
notehes, are loosened. I f the material is rubbed 
af this rime, the notched edges interlock. 



154 HOUSEHOLD IIANAGEMENT 

(?) The use of strong SOal,S or a]ka]ies. These aet 
ehemieally on the fibres and soften and expand 
them. eausing the notehed edzes to beeome so 
pmmincnt that they (-at,-h in one am,ther. 

NoTv..--The structure of woollen fibres may be sketched on 
the black-board and compared with those of cotton and linen. 

To iml,re.< the f,,regoin prin«'ip]c., a few êxperimenfs 
will ho, fimnd nu,st u:eful. 

I-;XPF.RI.IEXT. WIT[[ ('LOTII .IADE OF WO(L FIBRE 

1. Boil a pieee of new woollen cloth for rive minutes. Dry, 
and «.«anpare with an origial piece. 

2. Saturaie a piece ,f new woollen eloth with a strong 
s«,lutmn «,f washin s,,da. I)ry. and c.mpare with an 
«,riinal I,ieee. 

3. Wa.q a pieee ¢)f new w,ollen eh,th in eaeh of the f«,llow- 
inzwav. : 
(1) Bv ru],hinzs«,ap direeth" on the elofll and then 
sousing the g«,«,«ls in the water. 
(2) Bv using a s,ap solution instead of the soap, as 
iii (1). 
(3) BV ruhbing on a wash-board. 

In each case dry the d,,th and compare with an original 
pieee. 
After the re.ult.¢ «,f the experiments bave heen dis- 
eussed, the pupi|s mav f«rnmlate a series of "points" fo 
be observed in the washing of woollen fabries. 



LAUNDRY WORK 155 

Cotton fibres magnified 

Linen flbre magnifled 

Woollen fibres magnifled 



156 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

:POINTS IN" WASItI\'G 'OOLLENS 
1. Use lukewarm, soft water. 
2. I)«» n«»t use strong soaps or alkalics. 
3. Do hot rub soap directly on the woollen material, but 
use soap solutions. 
4. D,_» hot rub or twist woollen cloth when it is wet. 
5. Do hot boil fo sterilize. 
6. lo not dry in extreme boat. 

STEPS IN" WASIIING WOOLLE :IATERIALS 
1. Slake or brush the clothing fo free it from dust. 
2. Put if into ]ukewarm, soapy water fo soak for a few 
minutes. 
3. Wash on both sides by squeezing and sousing in the 
water. 
4. Rinse in clcar. ]ukewarm watcr; use several waters, 
if necessary, fo remove the soap. 
5. Pass thr«,uzh a looscly set w.ringer or squeeze the water 
out by hand. 
6. Shake, in order fo raise the woo]ly fibres. 
7. Dry in a moderate temperature, in a wind, if possible. 



('IIAI'TEI X 

FORMIV: SENIOR GRADE 

FOODS 

TttE Senior Fourth cla.s i. the preparatory «.la». for 
entranee into the high sch«,ol, and for manv girls it i.s thc 
final sehool year. For this reason thc C(,ursê «,f this vcar 
should cover as manv of thc rêmaining hou.êh.hl opêra- 
tions as possible. 
The training of the prêvious year. slmuhl have formed 
good habits of work and bave given experie)ce in ordin- 
ary cleaning, and in thc cooking aml serving of the simple 
food materials. Through this training the pupils should 
also havc l»een impressed with the value of f,od, and should 
bave learnêd the sources of f,,«»d aud «,f all wcll-kn«,wn 
household material.. 
The training of this la.t year. while continuing the 
Junior work, shoubl also empba.ize tbe household pro- 
cesses that require greater mental evelopmcnt to undêr- 
stand and greater practical skill t« carrv out. It is the 
border year between the public school and thê high sch«ol, 
and must neêessarily anticipate the elementarv science 
tbe latter. Iu this vear more responsibility sh()ul,l 
given to the pupils and mrre originality shou]d l»e expeeted 
of flem. Wbere thev bave hithêro f«,llowel reeipes ami 
been givên rules, thêy shouhl now foll«tw prineiplês and 
deduee r .les. 
Of tte several topies ontlined in the Cour.e for Fornl 
IV Senior, if is advisahle fo sfart with thê preservafion of 
food. Fruit and vegetables are nlo.t plentiful whên the 
157 



158 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

seho,l vear opens, and Septelnber is the most opportune 
month fo preserve these for winter use. Fa«ts eoneerning 
fi,od preservation mav bave been taken ineideutally in 
prei-us h.sso,s, but now the subje«t sh«ruh| Ire svstematie- 
ally taught, so that canuing, preservin, and piekling may 
ire intelligently ]rractised. 

I'REsERVATIOX OF FOOI) 

CAUSE OF DECAY 
The lesson may be iutroduocd by referrin fo the un- 
usual attention given to fruit at the rime of ripening. 
The ee«m««uieal housekeept'r takes certain fi.»ds when they 
are re.st plentiful aml preserve. thcm f.r use when they 
are lmt in seas.t. Se»me ft.,]s reqllire Slwvial «are ter keep 
thcm fr.m de«aying. The deoav is eauscd bv the avtion 
.f micr.copit, plants called "" bm.teria ", which get into the 
BAçTERIA 
It is difficult f,,r anv ,me fo get a crrect conception of 
i,aoteria : espe(.ially is it s,r for ohihlren, q'he tva,.her sh,ru]d 
be nmst eareful m,t t,r attemlrt fo give the olass uuimpor- 
tant details, but the few nevessarv fa«.ts shouhl Ire ruade 
very elear and real. The following points should be im- 
pressed : 
1. P, aeteria are plant. (This faet shouhl he kept elearlv 
in mind.) 
2. Thev are mieroseopie in size and henee the more diflï- 
eult ter deal with. 
3. They are round evervwhere that there is lire--in the 
air, in water, in the soil. 



PRESERVATION OF FOOD 159 

4. They multiply verv rapidly under favourable condi- 
tions. 

5. Se»nie 1,acteria are useful fo the h,»usekeeper; many 
kinds are her enenlies. 

6. St,me of thes, (.iWlllie.q get int- fo-d and. growing thcrc. 
cause a chall:e il| it--thcn wc sav the f,,««l i 
si)oiled. 

('OXI)ITI(tN'. ¢, OF BCTERIAL GROWTII 
All plants have the saine requirement.. Anv well-known 
plant mav he put befrc the ,-lass t,» hcll> hcm t,, think 
of these. Thev must be t,,ld that micr,,scopic plants differ 
fronl other plants in c,ne respect: thcv d,, ]ot nced lizht. 
I/ente ],aeterial requirenlettts are as f,,]lors: (1) water, 
(2) f,od. (3) air («,xygen}. (4) heat. 
The class should be led to sec that if anv one of these 
conditions is relnoved, the remaining ones are inufficient 
for the plant's aetivitv. 

:ME_*.:'. OF OVERCOMING B ,CTERIA 
To the hou.ekeeper, preserving food means overcoming 
bacteria. There are onlv two wavs of doing this, either of 
which may be chosen: 
1. Kill the bacteria in the food and exclude others. 
2. Subject the f««d fo conditions which are unfavourable 
for bacterial growth. 

In the first way, extreme heat i. used fo kill the bac- 
feria in the food. and then while hot. the food is sealed fo 
keep out other bacteria: Exanlple, eanning. 



lb0 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

In the second way, conditions are ruade unfavourable 
te, thc I,a,.teria in the f,,od, as 
1. The ba«teria are dcprived of water; the food is dried. 
"L The bacteria are deprive,1 ç,f sucient heat 
cold storage is used. 
3. Large, quantifies «»f certain substan«cs whi«.h are detri- 
m,«tal te» the gr«» th ,»f ba,.t«ria are put int« the 
ami the baeteria hec'orne inactive. Examples: sait. 
suvar, spices, vincgar, smtkc, or certain ,.hemi,-a]. 
When the lesson is finished, the class is ready to prac- 
fise the principles it involves. The lessons ,n the special 
preser'ation of fruit mav fll«,w at once. 

Utensils used in «anning 

CANN[NG 

As canning is the method ¢»f preservation most eom- 
monly used. practiec should be given in this method. In 
rural s«hools with a limited equipment, if may be that only 
one jar ean be prepared. In other schools, if mav be im- 
possible fo provide each pupil with material for work. on 
account of the expense. In the latter case, the materials 



CANNING 161 

may ail be brought from home, or eaell pupil may bring 
lier .Wh jar alibi fruit, and thc scho.l supply the suzar. 
Instruction on the eare of jars and the preparation of 
fruit and syrup must precede the practical work. 

cA. OF ,±US 
1. Sec that tbe jars are air-tigbt; partly fill the jar with 
water; 1,1a«'c ruhhers, covers, and rinls  screw tigbtly, 
and invert. If anv water o,zes out, the jar is hot air- 
tight. Often an extra ruhber will correct the trouble. 
?. Wasb the jars thoroughly with thc aid of a small 1,rush. 
3. Sterilize the jars in every part; dip thcln in boiling 
water, or place them on a test (fo]ded paper or 
wooden slats) in a kettle, to prevent the jars from 
touching the bottom. Fill and surr,,uM them with 
fepid water, thon place them over heat unti] the water 
boils. Keep tbem in the hoiling water until rea,lv 
fo fill with fruit. Dip the rubber bands in boiling 
wafer, but do hot al]ow them to remain in it. Use 
new rubbers eaeh seas(m. 
4. en filling the jars. place them on a folded eloth 
wrung out «»f warm water, then seal, and invert until 
cool. 
PREPRATI()N" fF FRUIT 
Use fresh, sound fruit, hot too ripe. 
1. Berries.Pi«k over. wash in a strainer, and hull. 
2. Currants, ooseberries.Piek over, wash, remove ends 
and stems. 
3. Cherries.Pick over. wasb, rem«ve stones and stems. 
4. Plums.Pi«k over. u'ash, remove stems, at pri«k three 
or four times with a silver fork, in order fo prevent 
the steam bursting the skin, 



162 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

5. Pear:. apples.--Pick over, wash, pare, and, to prevent" 
discoloration, keep in cold water until used. 
6. Pea«hês.--Pick over, plunge into boiling water a few 
seconds (using a wire basket), then into c«»ld water; 
peel ; drop into cold water fo prevent discoloration. 

Çse about 1 cup of water for each pint can. 
No. I S.vrup.--Equal part» of suar and water, or 1 
cup of water and ! cup of suar. 
No.  .yrup.--]½ cups of water and I cup of sugar. 
l. Use No. I syrup f«r water fruit» and acid fruit». 
2. Use No.  :yrup for pear:, peaehe», sweet plumE, sweet 
cherries, etc. 

METHODS OF 
1. Fruit cooked in a steamer: 
Fill the sterilized jars with prepared fruit, with or 
without syrup. Place the «ver:, but do hot fasten 
them dowu. Stand the jar: in a steamer over cold 
water. ('over the :teamer and .heat to the boiling 
point. .team at least fifteen minute., or until the 
fruit is tender. P, emove from the steamer, fill fo 
overflowing with boiling :)amp, and seal at once. 
Invert. 
?. Fruit cooked in a boiler: 
Put a fal:e bottom in the boiler, fo prevent the jar: 
from bein hroken. Fill the jars with fruit, and 
a«]d syrup if d,:ire«]. Coer anti place the jar in 
the boiler without touehing one another. Pour in 
tepid water fo within an ineh of the top of the jars 
and bring gradually to boiling heat. Cook and 
finish as directed in 1. above. 



JAMS AND PRESERVES 163 

3. Fruit eooked in an oven: 
Fill sterilized, hot jars with prepared raw fruit and 
cover with h,t syrup, l'lace the jars in a moderatc 
oven, in a bakilg dish c, mtaining about au inch or 
two of h,,t wator. C»,,k ami finish as in 1, aboie. 
4. Fruit cooked in a kettle: 
3lake a syrup in a fairlv deep kêttle. Put the pre- 
pared fruit into if and cook gcntly until tender. 
When thê fruit is cooked, lift earefullv into hot, 
sterilized jars, and fill to overflowing with boiling 
syrup. Sêal af once and invert. 
NoxE.By Methods 1. 2. and 3 the fruit is kept more I)er- 
fect in shape and loses less flavour than by :Vlethod 4. Methods 
2 and 4 are best fo choose for class practice. 
After the lêsson in Canning, it may hot be wie fo take 
the school rime for ïurther praetice in the preservation of 
fruit. When sm'h is the case, the theorv t)f jam and jelly 
making Inay be discussed in class for home practice. The 
notes of these lessons may apl)ear as follows : 

JAMS AND PRESERVES 
POINTS I_N  MAKING JAM 
1. In this method sugar is the preservative, therefore the 
amount used must be large. 
2. The quantity of suffar used is from three quarters fo 
one pound of suzar fo each pound of fruit. Little or 
no water is used. 
3. The natural shape and appearance of the fruit is not 
kept. 
4. The flavour of tht. fruit is hot so natural, on account 
of the excessive sweetness. 
5. The jar need hOt be sealed, but merely covered. 



164 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

JELLY 

COMPO.ITION OF JELLY 

1. Jelly is ruade frm certain fruit juices and sugar. 
2. The fruit juice must contain a certain amount of pectin, 
or jellying principle, and also a certain alnount of 
acid. 

P.¢T. (F »':UT CO'TALNO m.T 
(1} Skin, (2} core, (3) pits and seeds. 

/II I 

Utensi]s used in making je]]y 

FRUITS CONTAI-N'ING MOST PECTI 
1. Currants 
2. Crab-apples, apples 
3. Quinces 
4. Cranberries. b]ackberries, raspberries 
5. Grapes, if rather green. 



PICKLING 165 

METHOD OF MAKING JELLY 
1. Cut up the prepared fruit if necessary, and add barely 
enough water for cooking. 
2. Set over the heat and simmcr gently until the cellulose 
is very soft. 
3. Turn into a jelly-bag, and drain for a number of hours 
or over night, in order to get rid of the cellulose. 
4. Measurc the drained juicc and take the same quantity 
of sugar. 
5. Heat the sugar in the oven. 
6. Boil the juice gently and steadily for twenty minutes, 
skimming when required. 
7. Add the hot sugar and boil very gently from three fo 
rive minutes, or mtil t|le mixture will jelly when 
tested. 
8. Empty af once into hot glasses and set fo cool. 
9. When cold and firm, cover and set in a cool, dark place. 

METHODS OF COVERING JAM OR JELLY 
1. Melt paraffin and pour a layer on each glass, cover with 
a tin eover or paper pasted with egg-white. 
2. Cut clean, white paper to fit the glass, and lay on the 
jelly when it is firm and cold. Place the cover or 
paper as in 1, al)ove. 

PICKLING 
Where the teacher finds it desirable, a lesson should 
now be given on pickling, with or without class practice. 
At least one or two good recipes may be given for home 
use. 
There are no new principles to teach. The use of 
vinegar, salt, and spices as preservatives should be reviewed. 
12 



CHAPTER XI 

FORM IX': SEXI(}R (RADE (Continued) 

COOKERY 

THE FI]I.¢,T work in eookerv, f«»r this Form, should con- 
sist of practice lessons, which will test the abilitv of the 
class ilt cooking the simple animal and vegetable foods. 
The recipes used for these should be such as fo attract the 
int«,rest «»f the pul)i]s, and each mav be a combination of 
several f6¢,d materials. ('rcam s-up., j-ustards, scalh»l)ed 
dis]lCS, and shcpherd's pie, w«»uhl be useful for this 
purp«»se. 
If is desirahle that this test shall be ruade in as few 
fessons as possible, because nearlv all the rime in cookery 
for this vear wi]l be required fl»r the new work, name]y, a 
series of lessons on flour mix-tures. 

OUTLINE OF LESSON ON FLOUR 
Flour is a food substance ground into a powder. 
1. Sources of flour: 
(1) Certain cereals--wheat, rye, barley, buckwheat, 
rice 
(2) Potatoes. 
2. Kinds of flour ruade from wheat: 
(1) Graham flour--the entire wheat seed is ground. 
(2) Whole wheat flour--the first outer coat of 
cellulose with its valuable mineral contents is 
removed beforc the secd i. round. 
166 



LESSON ON FLEUR 167 

(3) White flour--onlv the central whitc part of the 
seed is ground. 
NOTE.--The pupils should be given specimens of fall wheat 
te examine, se as te compare the outer coat of cellulose with 
the central white part of the grain. 
3. Composition of white fleur: 
(1) Starch--a fine, granular, white substance 
(2) Gluten--a sticky, yellowish, elastie sui,stance (a 
protein food ). 
To tind tl,e sul,stances iii white flour, eaeh pupil should 
mix half a eup of bread flour with enough c.hl water to 
make a d.ugh. She nmst then I,e taught t, knead it. This 
knowledge will be of use later i,, thc bread lessons. After 
it is thoroughly kneaded until it i. smooth and well 
blended, the dough should be washed in several waters. 
The first washing water sh-uld 1,o l,-ur(.d int- a glass and 
allowed fo settle, fo show the stareh. After all the stareh 
is washed away. the gluten will romain. 
The gluten mav then be put into a greased pari and 
baked, fo demonstrate that it admits of distenti,n. 
also fo show that if mav be stiffened permanently bv heat 
into anv distended shape. The baked gluten shouhl I,e 
reserved to be used as a speeimen in sueeeeding lessons. 
4. Kinds of wheat fl,,ur: 
{l) Bread fl-ur--contains much gluten. 
(?) Pa.trv fl-ur--eontains little gluten. 
NoTE.--Macaroni is a paste made from wheat our which 
contains much gluten. 
5. Tests for bread fleur: 
(1) Thc colour is a deeper cream than pastry fleur, 
on aeeount of the larger amount of gluten 
which if contains. 



168 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(2) When squeezed, it will hot hold the impress of 
the hand. 
(3) When the flour is lnade into a dough and washed, 
about one fourth of the original quantit)" re- 
lnains as gluten. 

OUTLINE OF SERIES OF LESSONS ON FLOUR MIXTURES 

LESSON I 
I. 31eaning of flour mixtures: 
A lightened mixture of flour and liquid, with or 
without other ingredients., is called a flour 
mixture. 
2. Kinds of flour mixtures: 
(l) Batters.--(a) Pour batters--pancakes, popoers 
(b) Drop batters--cake 
(2} Doughs.--(a) ,qoft dough--cookies, baking-pow- 
der biscuits, doughnuts 
(b} Stiff dough--pastry. 
3. MeIhods of mixing flour mixtures: 
(1  Stirring.--A roundabout movement which simply 
mixes the ingredients. 
(? } ];vating.--An upright, circular movement, which 
incorporate. air into the ingredients while be- 
ing mixed. 
(3) Folding.--A slow, careful beating. rhich blends 
the ingredients without lo:s of the air they 
contain. 
Kneadinz.A movement of the hands fo blend 
the ingredients and a|so fo incorporate air. 
of a knife fo 

(4) 
(5) ('uttinr.--A ha,,king movemcnt 
mix fat through flour. 



FLOUR MIXTURES 169 

4. Framework of ftour mixtures: 

(1) Gluten 
(2) Gluten and egg-white. 
To show the framework, the gluten baked in the flour 
fessons shouhl be use& It should be pointed out as the 
skeleton of the mixture which upholds the cntire structure 
and on whi«h the other in:..,redients depend. T[, have light 
mixtures, this framework must adlnit of being expanded 
and also of being stiffened permanently into the stretched 
shape. Since egg-white has both of these nece.sary quali- 
iies, if mav be used for a framework either alone or in 
eombination with gluten. 
It should also be observed that a mixture of ingredieuts 
light lu weight de,es uot prevènt the framework from ri.ing 
as mueh as heavv ones do. 
The pupils will see that the framework of a mixture 
nmst inerease in size in .Mer t« make the mixture lizht, 
but if must be ruade verv elear that, while heat stiffens any 
framework, it will hot distend it. ,ome other ageney is 
required for this. 

5. Lightening agents used in flour mixtures: 
(1) Air.--Ineorporated I»y beating, kneading, and 
sifting. 
(2) Steam.--Iueorporated iu the form of a liquid 
whieh, wheu heated, changes t, steam. 
(.3) ç'arbonie a«id as.--Formed in the mixture hv 
the ehemieal uuion of soda with s-me aeid. 
Examples: soda aud sour milk; soda, cream of 
tartar and water; soda and molasses. 



170 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Thc lihtening ant.,, air and steam, mav be taught 
from the saml,lcs of baked glufen. Experiments will show 
]lOW t,» l»ro,]u('c the (.arbonic acid gas 

Experiments : 
I. l'ut into a thick glass a s tsp. of soda and ¼ tsp. of 
«ream of tartar. 3Iix, and note the result. Stir 
in as eup of e,ld water, and note the result. 
2. In No. 1. use hot water in place of col,l, and note 
the result. 
3. Put -I cup «,f sour milk in a ,.-lass. ,qtir into the 
milk  tsp. of soda. and n,»te the result. 
4. Put 1 tbsp. of molasses in a glass. Stir into the 
molasses a pinch of soda, and note the result. 
Baking-powder : 
It mav now be explained that. for the sake of conveni- 
ente, soda an,1 cream of tartar mav be obtained already 
mixcd, in ac«urate proportions of two parts of acid to 
of the soda. This mixture is known as baking-powder. 
As erv little mt, isture is necessarv t,, start the action of 
the powder, a little corn.tarch is adde,] to if fo keep it drv. 
For the saine rea.,on, it should alwavs be kept tightly 
covered. 
Soda is ruade from conmon sait ancl is eheap, but the 
source of cream of tartar makes it expensive, so that good 
I»akinff-p«,wder cannot be low priced. If such be adver- 
tised, it is usuallv adulterated. 
As soon as the foreoing principles of flour mixtures 
are understood, thev should bê put into practicê. The 
lessons on cake, hread, and pastry shouhl follow in the 
order named, with as nmch practical work in connection 
with each as the time will allow. 



CAKE MAKING 171 

CAKE MAKING 

LE.S,ONS II AND III 

1. Classes of cake: 
(1) Cakes without butter.--The.¢e mixtures contain 
no heavy ingredients and have little weight 
depending on the framework. They are light- 
ened bv air and steam onlv. Examples: sponge 
cake, angel cake. 
(2) Cakes vith btter.--These are mixtures having 
ingrêdiênts of greater wêight; and the three 
lightening agents--air, steam, and carbonic 
acid gas are u.*ed to rai.*e them. Examplcs: 
pound cake, ehoeolate cake, nut cake, etc. 

NOT..--Practice should be given in making at least one of 
each kind of cake, to demonstrate the method of mixing 
emlloyed. 

2. General directions for making cake: 
(1) Attend to the tire, so as to have the oven at a 
proper heat. 
(?) Grea,¢c the pans thoroughly; greased paper mav 
be u.¢ed fo line thc b,»ttom of the tin, but, in thc 
case of fruit cake, the whole tin .¢houhl be lined. 
(3} Have everythinz ready, so that the mixing may 
be quiekly donc. 
(4) Use pastry tour. 
(5} Use fine granulated sugar fo ensure its being 
dissolved. 
(6) Blend the ingredients thoroughly, and af the 
saine rime ineorporate as large an anmunt of 
air as possible. 



172 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

(i) Fill the I)an ab«»ut two-thirds full, pushilg thé 
mixtu'e wdl te» th«, «.«,rners and sides, so as fo 
leae a depres.*ion in thé (.entre. 
(8) Atténd earefully t«, thé haking. 
.3. lleneral rules for mixing cake: 
(1) Cake without I»utter-- 
(a) SeI)arate thé yolk. and whiIe. of thé eggs. 
(b) Béat thé volks until thiek and lenlon- 
eoloured. 
(c) Add sugar to thé yolks gradually and eon- 
tilme I»eating; add thé flavouring. 
(d Béat thé whites until stiff and dry, then 
[old them into thé first mixture. 
(e) C, raduallv sift and fold in thé flour until 
well mixcd. 
(?) Cake with butter-- 
(a) Cream thé butter }ff working if with a 
wooden spoon. 
(b) Add thé sugar graduall 3" by stirring it in. 
(c) Béat thé eggs until light, and add fo thé 
first mixture. (Thé eg.¢s may bé separ- 
ated and thé whites added later.) 
(d) Add thé liquid and béat until thé sugar 
is thoroughly dissolved. 
(e) 5Iix thé flour and haking-powder in a 
sifter and gradually sift and beat it into 
the mixture until if is thoroughly 
blended. 
(Liquid and flour may ],e added 
alternately.) 
(f) Fold in thé stiffty beaten whites, if thé 
eggs bave been separated. 



CAKE MAKINÇ 173 

If fruit, peel, nuts, etc., are used, the¢ 
should be floured out of the qîlantity 
allowed for the cake and added last. 

,4. General directi«,ns f,,r baking cake: 
(1) .mall, rhin cakes should ire baked in a hot oxen. 
Examples: cookies, laver cake. 
(2) Ail loaf cakes require a moderate oven. 
(3) In bakin calmes, ditide the rime stated in the 
recipe into quarters'as follows: 
First quarter--lnixture should begin to rire. 
Second quarter--mixture shouhl continue 
rising. 
Third quarter--mixture should beiu to 
browu and to stiffeu int«, shape. 
Fourth quarter--mixture should finish 
I,rowniug and stiffening and shrink, 
slightly from the sides of the pan. 
(4) Mixture is cooked when a slight pressure leaves 
no dent, or when a snall skewer or fine knit- 
ting-needle put into the centre cornes out clean 
and àrv. 
To the inexperienced minds of the girls in the Fourth 
Form, fo whom the studv of flour mixtures is new. the 
number and variety of these seens verv large. Ail cook 
books give an ahnost endless collection of recipes for cakes, 
cookies, muffins, etc., and to the pupils each of these seems 
an entirelv new mixture. In reality, manv of them are 
but slight variation. of the saine type. A certain mixture 
of materials is used for a foundation, and nunerous varie- 
ties are ruade from this by a«ldition, subtraction, or sub- 
stitution of ingredients. The original mixture is called 



174 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

a basic recil»'. In:tead of teaehing is,lated mixtures, it 
will be round an excellent idea fo give the elas. the ba.ic 
ingredient. fi,r a reeipe and encourage them fo suggest 
variation., either original or from memorv. 
Typical ba.,ie reeipes for cake and biscuits are given 
below : 

¼ eup butter 
4 a eup .ugar 
½ cup milk 

1 eup flour 
:} tsp, salt 
2 t.p. baking-powder 
½ t:p. vanilla. 

YARIkTIONS OF BASIC IIECIPE FOR CAKE 
1. Spiee cake: 
Tn the basie reeipê add 1 tbsp. of ,piee. Sift in the 
spiee with the flour. 

2. Nut «.ake : 
Ad,1 ½ eup of chopped nut.. Inerea.e the baMng- 
powder bv one third. Put a little of the flour on 
the nuts and beat them in af the last, 

3. Fruit cake: 
Add -1 cup of currant., raisin.,, fiZ., or date», or a 
mixture of ail. Increase the baking-powder by 
one third. Flour the fruit and add it la»t. 

4. Chocolate cake: 
Add ½ cup grated chocolate. Increa.e the milk bv 
2 thsp. IIeat the ehocolate in the milk just 
enough fo dissolve if. Cool the mixture and use 
in place of milk. 



BASIC RECIPE FOR BISCUITS 175 

BASI[' RE('II'E FOR BI.CUIT. q. ET['. 

2 cups flour 
½ tsp. sait 
4 tsp. baking-powder 
2 thsp. fat (butter. lard. [,r dripping) 
About  ¢'tlp milk. 

VAP, I XTIONS (F BA.qI[' RE['IPE F(tll BI.['UIT.q 

1. Sweet biscuit: 
Add 2 tbsp. of sugar after the fat is a[hh.d. 
2. Fruit biscuit: 
Add 2 tbsp. of sugar and ½ cup of fruit, (currants, 
raisins, peêl, or a mixture of ail) after thê fat is 
addêd. 

3. Scones : 
Add 2 tbsp. of sugar, and use one ezg an«l only  cup 
of milk. Boat the egg until light, add to lnilk, 
aud use this 5)r liquid. F[»rm into r«»und (.akos 
about eight inches in diamcter, and eut into 
quarters. 
4. Fruit sconês : 
Add ½ cup of fruit to the scorie reeipe. 
5. Short cake for fruit: 
Saine as scones, but double thê amount of fat. 
6. Dumplings for stêws: 
Use thê basic rêcipe, leaving out thê fat. 
7. Stêamêd fruit pudding: 
Use the ha.,ic recipc fo make the d,,ugh that ineases 
the fruit. 



176 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

BREAD MAKING 
In beginning the brcad les.on., it wi]l be found that 
thcre are no new prhcil»]e. t- tea«h. It wi]l, however, be 
neces.arv t- cxplain thc new means ,f l»rodueinK gs whieh 
is u.ed in this particular mixture, namely, vea,t. 
Fr,m their lcssons on/he " Preser ation of Food " and 
"" {'amin.,..,", the pul»il. are alrcadv acquainted with ont 
-ia.«s of mieroscopie plants. The ]ittle plants, in that case, 
werc a s-urce of vrcat inconvenience fo the housekeeper. 
Ycast mav be introduced as another familv of one-cê]lcd 
plants, but one which is most uscful. Undor good con- 
ditions the.¢c tiuy plants will produ.e a large amount of 
earbon di,xide ga.. provid,d thev are giron suffieicnt rime. 
If, howevcr, the zas I,c required qui«kl.v, soda and aeid 
must he used. F.r this rca.on, plai flour mixtures, in 
whi«h the carbon di-xidc is quickl.v marie, are cal|cd quiek 
breads, fo distinguish thcm fr-m breads in whi-h veast is 
used. Examp]e. of these are baking-powdcr biscuits, geins, 

«orn-brcad. etc. 
The use of vea:t is the 
obtaining carhonic aeid gas. 

simplest and cheapest wav of 
and mixtures so ruade remaia 

moist longer than those in which baking-powder is used. 
Throughout the introductory ]esson, this fact must be 
kept promincntly bcfi,re the c]ass, that veast i. a plant and, 
as such, requires plant conditions. The necessarv condi- 
tions will be known from t]m les.on on '" Baceria ", so that 
thev have on]v fo be reviewed. The pupils may be to]d 
that although they cannot see the plants, thev can very 
plainly sec the bubbles of gas whieh the plants give off 
when the latter are made active under faourable con- 
ditions. 



YEAST 177 

LES.SON 

OUTLINE OF LEONS ON YEA.T 

1. Description of yeast: 
Yeast is a one-celled plant which can be seen only with 
a microscope, l'mler good c,nditions it becomes verv 
m-tire and multiplies rapidly bv a process called buddin.l. 
It is used by the hou.,ekeeper for the carbonic acid gas it 
gives off. 
@, 

Yeast plants magnified 

2. Conditions necessary for the activity of ycast: 
(l) Oxygen 
(2) Water 
(3) Food.--This must be sugar, or starch which it 
will change into sugar, l'otato starch is more 
easily used by yeast than flour starch. It uses 
also some nitrogenous ft,od and mineral 
matter. 
(4) Heat.--The yea.t plant thrives in a heat of about 
the saine temperature as our bodies. A little 
extra heat will only make it grow faster; but 
excessive heat will kill i,t. 
Freezin:z will n,t kill file plant, though cold 
makes ycast inactixc. 



178 HOUSEHOLD IIANAGEMENT 

3. Sources of yeasf: 
Ycast was first fou,,d as u'ild yeast in thc air, but now 
it may I,c obtaincd at gr,ccry stores, in thrce forms : 
() Liquid yeast.Thc plants arc put into a starchy 
liquid. This will keep only a fcw days, as the 
starch sours. 
(2) l}ry yeast.Thê plants are put into a starchy 
paste and the mixture is dried. This form 
will keep f,r mouths, heeanse it i» perfeetly 
drv but, for the saine reason, it takes the plants 
a long finie to beconle active when used. 
(3) Compressed yeast.The plants are put into eakes 
of a starchv nlixture and left moist. They will 
keep only a few davs. Good compressed yeast 
is a ]»aie fawn e.hmr, smells sweet, breaks 
cleau, and cruntbles easily. 
4. Experiments with yeast: 
Make a llea«t 9arde! hv using the planers obtained af 
the groeery store as follows: 
Take hall a eup of lukewarm water to give the plants 
moisture, a teaspoonfu] of snar for immediate food, and 
the saine ,f wheat star,h (flour} for a reserve fo.,1. Beat 
the mixture to infold oxygen, and then put in one-quarter 
cake of 'east plants. 
Divide the mixture ammff a number of test-tubes, so 
that ea«h group of four pupils has three. 

(1) Place one test-tube in warm water and heat to 
boiling, o 
(2) Place one test-tube in water which feels warm 
fo the hand. 



BREAD-hIAKING 1"/9 

• (3) l'lace one test-tube in cracked ice and freeze the 
mixture. Aftcrwards thaw, and place the 
saine tcst-tubc in lukcwarm watcr. 
Observe the results, and conlpare the amount of gas 
formed undcr the diffcrcnt conditions. 

LESSON II 
PRACTI{.'AL BREAD-MAKING 
Ingredients of plain brcad" 
1. Liquid.--(1) It wets tlle mixturc and causes the 
il,grcdicnts to adhcrc. 
(2) If furnis]les stcam for a lightcning 
agent. 
(3) If all,ws thc glutcn fo become stickv 
and clastit-. 
(4) If furnishes moisture for yeast plants. 
2. Yeast.--It gives »ff carbonic acid gas, which lightens 
the mixture. 
3. Sait.- (1) If gives a flavour. 
(2) If retards the growth of the yeast 
plant. 
4. Flour.--(l) If thickes the mixture. 
(2.) It supplies food for the veast plant. 
(3) It supplics gluten for a framework for 
the mixture. 

Amount of ingredient.¢ for one small loaf: 
Liquid--1 cup or ½ pt. 
Sait--½ t.p. 
FlourAbout thrce rimes thc amount of liquid 



180 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

east--Amouut depends ou the time given the bread 
to rise, as follow.: 
12 hr. fo rise 5 hr. to rise 3 hr. fo rise 
¼ yca.t cake ½ ycast cake 1 yeast cake 
NoTE.--One cake of compressed yeast contains about the 
samo number of yeast plants as ono cako of dry yeast or one 
cup of liquid yeast. 

l'rcess i1 makin bread : 
(1) 31ixing (.tirring, beating, and kneading).-- 
() This mixes the ingredients. 
(b) It incorporates air to aid the veast plant 
and to a«-t as a lightening agent. 
(c) It makes the gluten ela.¢tic. 
(2) First rising.This allows the yeast plants con- 
ditions aud rime to produce carbonic acid gas, 
until the dough is distended to twice its origi- 
nal size. 
(3) 3loulding.(a) This distributes the gas evenly 
throughout the loaf. 
(b) It shapes the loaf. 
(4) ,':,t,c,nd ri.inz.--This again allows the veast 
plants rime to produce gas which will dis- 
tend the dough fo twice its size. 
(5) Baking.--(,tl The hcat .f the oven expauds the 
air and gas in the dough, which causes 
the gluten framework to di.tend. 
(b) The water changes to steam, which be- 
cornes anothcr agent in distending the 
gluten. 



BREAD-MAKING 181 

(¢) The starch on the outside of the l-af be- 
cornes brown in the drv heat of the oven, 
while the inside stareh is ruade s.lul»le in 
the lnoist heat .f the mixture. 
(d) Thc gluten stiffens into the distendcd 
shape. 
(e) The veast plants are killed. 

In this lessoli, after deciding on the necessarv ingre- 
dients, the pupils lnay he tohl the am«,unt ,f eaeh t,» use 
for their class w.rk. Thev shouhl then lneasure and mix 
these ingrt, dients and set the d,»nh awav for the first 
rising. While the bread is rising, the kitchen mav be put 
in order and thc other step. of the process reasoned out 
and written. 
Other school work must Ire taken then. until the dough 
has fully risen, when the pr.eess mav I,e e.mplèted. Af ter 
eaeh stage of the process has been carried out, the notes 
on it may i,e written. 
With the foregoing prineiples of I»read-lnakin in mind. 
the dass sh.uhl he al»le te make anv l,read mixture. Eaeh 
pupil shouhl have entire resp,nsil,ility f,,r the proeess of 
making one small h,af of plain bread. AI,out half a cup 
of liquid, mixed with the other neeessarv in,redients, 
lnakes a good-sized loaf f.r praeti«.e. .';maller loaves than 
this give little ehanee for manipulati,,n. 
In H,usehohl Mana.cernent centres, where the pupils 
corne frein other sch«,ols for the lesson period only, the 
process will have te be divided into two lessons. The first 
les.,n mav include the first two staes--mixin and first 
rising-ea«.h pupil usin small quantities, sav f,,r c,ne 
eighth of a loaf of the ordinary .ize. At the end of the 
lesson, they mav carry their dough home for completion, 

1 H.M. 



152 ttOUSEHOLD 5IANAGESIENT 

or if may be used by another class which is ready for the 
later steps of the process. 
The second lcsson will include the last three steps-- 
moulding, second rising, and baking--and if will be neces- 
sarv for the teacher fo have dough prepared for the mould- 
ing stage when the class arrives. 

LEsSo.'q III 

FANCY BI{EADS 
These mixtures are but variations of plain bread. The 
extra ingredients, sm.h as milk, eggs, butter, spices, suar, 
currant«, raisins, peel, etc., are added at the most con- 
renient stage of the process. 
NoT.--If there is hot tirne to bave one fancy bread, such 
as Parker House rolls or currant bread, marie in school, 
recipes for these may be discussed in class and the work donc 
at home. 
THE BREAD-MIXER 
1. This utensil mixes and beats the bread by means of 
a large beater turned with a handle, thus a-oiding 
the use of the hands for this purpose. 
2. It doe. this work with less energy and in a much 
shorter time than if the hands were used. 
3. If tan be used on]v for the first two steps of bread- 
making, namely, mixing and first rising. 
4. T]le ingredient. nmst all be put in af once; hence, 
t]ley must be accratelv measured. 
5. The amount of ingredients mav be learned hv cal- 
culation fr«m previ«us hread-makin.e donc in the 
old wav, or by using the book of recipes accompany- 
ing each mixer. 



PASTRY 153 

NOTE.--There are 8everal good kind8 of bread-mixer 
which may be bought in three sizes. Small ize make 1 to 2 
loaves and costs $1.35 (about). Medium size makes 2 to 6 
loave and costs $2.00 (about). Large size make8 4 to 10 
loaves and costs $2.50 (about). 

PASTRY 
Pastry is one of the simple.*t fl,»ur mixtures, and one 
that has the lowest food value. The intimate blcnding of 
butter or lard with the flour envelopês the starch grains 
with fat, and makes the mixture diflivult t-digcst. The 
saine thing occurs in fryin,,.,, f»d and in buttering hot 
toast; so the idea is m»t a new one to the t.lass. 
In introdueing the h.sson on pastry, this princil»le of 
digestion should be reviewed, and it should be ruade plain 
that dt.licate pudding and seasonable fruits are a much 
better form of dessert. 
There are no new prin«iples t-tea«h, but some 
ones to impress. The objeÇ.t ,f the h.sekeeper should 
be fo make a mixture that is lirlt aud one that w;.ll fall 
to pieces easih'. To ensure the latter, anything that u'ould 
toughen the gluten must be avoided. 
From the bread lesson, the pupils bave learned that 
working the water into the glutcn ,_,r nluch handling ,,f 
flour after it is wet. makes a mixture firnl and touh. In 
pastry there must be en,,uh luten to stick the ingredient.¢ 
together, but its elastic quality is undesirable. For the 
latter reason also. a small amount ,f water is used. 
In the cake mixtures, it was f,,und that the use of fat 
in the "butter eakes" ruade tl,e framework tender and 
easily broken, so tu pastry the saine meaus may be 
employed. Fat of s,me kin,1 is nlixed with tlle flour to 
act on the gluten and destroy its toughness. 



184 IlOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Air and steam are the only lightening agents eom- 
monlv ust«l in pastry. Sinee col,1 air oceupies less room 
lhan warm air and admits of nie,re expansion, it is desir- 
aide that tbe mixture be kept very col& The 1.w tem- 
perature also prevents tire fat meltin; hence, the neeessity 
fl,r the use of cold utensils and materials throughout the 
pl'Ocess. 
OUTLIXE OF LESSOX OX PASTI/Y 
1. Ingredients : 
(1) Fl.ur, (2) sait, (3) fat, (4) water. 

2. Notes on 
(1} l-se-nh" pastr.v tiour, w]lieh will bave a small 
amount «,f gluten. 
(2) After the fl,,ur is wet. handle the mixture as 
little as possible, ta avoid workinff tbe water 
ilt«, tbe gluten and making it tough. 

3. Notes on fat : 
( 1 ) Fat is u.¢ed fo destrov the elasticiiy of the gluten, 
so that it will hot be tough when cooked. 
{:) Butter, lard, or drippinff mav be use& 
{3) Lard makes more tender pastry than butter. 
(4) Butter gires the best flavour. 
(5) IIa]f butter and half lard makes a good mixture. 
(6) Lavers of fat may be put in between lavers of 
pastry, fo separate it into flakes. 
(7) If two fats are used, the softer i. eut into the 
flour, and the harder one laid on the paste 
and folded in. 



PASTRY. 185 

4. Notes on water: 
(1) Use the water as cold as possible. 
(2) l'se the h.ast amount ,,f water neeessarv fo mak,' 
the ingrediênts adhere. 

5. Light,.ning agents used in pastry: 

(1) Air.--(a) This sh,,uhl I,t. as c,,hl as l»,ssil,le. 
(b) The air nmv I,t, f,,]de, l in, between 
layers of pastry. 

,_ team. 
(2) . 

6. Kinds of pastry: 
(1) Plain pastry.--ln this, c,ne quarter to one third 
as mu,.h fat as flour is use,l, and it is all "' eut 
in" 
(2) Flakv pa.try.--|n this. the saine amount of fat 
is u.ed as in plain pastry, but ha]f of it is 
"" laid on" and f,.,]ded in. 
(3/ Puff pa.try.--ln this, one ball a. mueh fat as 
flour, up fo êqual parts of eaeh is used; one 
quarter of the fat i. eut in, and the remainder 
i. laid on and f,,hh.d in. 

7. Amount of ingredient. f,,r plain pastry for one pie: 
1. cup pastry flour" i sp. salt" ½ eup fat (lard and 
butter)- ice water. 



('HAPTER XII 

FOI]M IV: ,qEXl(l (fig.\DE (Continued) 

NEAT 

.'kS MEAT is rathor a eoml,h'x f,,o,1 the tea,-hiug of whid 
inv«,]ves a goo(1 nmny Iessons, and as it «loes hot Ieud 
itself as well as otber foods to thc making of dishes usefuI 
in practice work, if sec, ms wise fo defer the study of if 
untiI the Senior Form is reaehed: the abi]ity and home 
needs of the pupils sbou]«l decide this. The season of the 
vear shoul«l a]so be eonsidered. It is wiser fo take meat 
Icssons in ««,ld weather hccause it is thon more pleasant 
to hau«]le and casier fo keep. q'h«, latter cousidcration is 
important in some rural districts, where shops are hot con- 
renient. 
More preparation is needed for the first meat lesson 
than f.r toast foods. ome davs before, rhin I»mes such as 
]« or wing 1,ones of fowl, or rib bones of lamb shouhl be 
soaked in dilufed hydro«.h]orie or nifric aeid (one part acid 
to ten of water), to dissolve the mieral substace whieh 
ives the bone ifs riidify. 
Anv time efore tbe ]esson. a ]ar.e so]id bone of an old 
aima], sueh as a knee or hip joint of beef, should be burned 
for hours fo et riel of the connective tissue which holds 
the mineral substance in shape. Tbis should be earehflly 
,hme. in ord«.r te» retain the shape of the bone and fo show 
the por,us fornmti,m of the miuera] substance. If the 
1,one is u,,t bla«kene,l bv the tire, its white eolour will also 
ildicate the lime of whieh it is forme,l. 
186 



MEAT 187 

On the day of the lesson if will be necessary fo have a 
piece of meat showing the three parts--fat, bone, and 
muscle. A lower cut of the round of beef bas all thcse 
parts, and the muscle is suflïcient]y tough fo show its con- 
nective tissue p]ain]y. For tbe study of fat, a pieee of suet 
is best, as if ean be easi]y picked apart to show its forma- 
tion. 
Iu examining fat nwat and lean nwat it is essential 
that. af ]east, every two pupil bave a piece, as close 
scrutinv is noeessarv. {)ne or two saml]cs t,f I.mc will 
suffiee for the class. 
No definite amount of wc, rk can be laid down ff, r any 
one/esson. The /nterest and ability of the class must be 
the gui«]e. In rural schools, the rime of cach ]eson musË 
be eomparatively short, thouh no tlouehohl Manazement 
teaeher shou]d spend more than forty minutes on purely 
theoretica] work without a change of some kiud. 
The fo]lowing is an outline of the faets tobe con- 
sidered in this partieular study: 

LES80N I 

1. Names of meat: 
(1) Beef, from the on or cow. The best meat cornes 
from an animal about f,ur vears old. 
(2) Veal, fr«m the ealf. It should be af least six 
weeks old. 
(3) Mutton, from the shêep, gpring lamb is from six 
fo eight weeks c,]d- yêarling is (,ne vear (,Id. 
(4) Pork, from/he pig. 
(5) Fowl, poultry--ehieken, turkey, duck, goose. 
(6) (-lame, wild animals--deer, wild duek, partridge, 
etc. 



185 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

2. Parts of meat: 
(1) Fat.--(a) lnside fat, around the inlernal organs, 
u.uallv called kidney fat, or suet. 
(b) Outside fat, next the skin, called caul fat. 
(2) I;(,ne, (31 muscle, or h.an moat. 

3. (',,mpositil,n t»f fat: 
(11 Connective tissue, (2} truc fat, (3) water. 
Fat should be the first part studied, beeause it is the 
simplest tissue au,l the part are most p]aidy seen. Pick 
the sl»ecimeu al,art, and the tissue that hohls it together is 
f,,und, lts mme is easily dt, vt, h,l»t.d frt,m its use. 
The water mav I,e shown bv heatin pieces of fat in 
a small sau«.epan and. when it hec,,mes h,,t. covering the 
,lish with a col,1 plate. I:cm,»ve the plate bef,,re if gets 
heated, au,l moisture will he condensed on its surface. 
The preece of watcr in fat mav also be reasoned out by 
renwmbering that water enters into the composition of ail 
bodv ticsues. 

t. ('-mp,,siti,,n of b,,ne: 
(1} Mineral marrer (lime), ('2) eonnectire tis.ue, 
(3 } watr. 
Xeithcr the minerai substance nor the connective ri:sue 
in b,,ne tan be sêen until either che «.r the other is e]im- 
inated. 
.";trike the fresh bone with a stee| kuife, and if shows 
the quality of hardness. Bones are built from food, and 
the onlv food substance that is so hard i: minerai matter. 
Show the burned bone. with onlv the minerai marrer left, 
and let eaeh pupil examine it. Its formation indieates 



MEAT 159 

the spaces which the part burned out of it occupied. Let 
it fall or crush part of it in the fiugers, to show how 
easily itis brokên. uch boues wouhl be no use as a 
framework fo support the bodv. The bonês of very 
persons get too much like this. and we are af raid to have 
such people fall. The burned bone needs something 
h,ld it t,,gether--a «,,nue«tive tissue. Su«-h a tissue was 
iu the spaces l,cri,re the bOllê was burucd. 
Show the bone af ter it bas bêe» prêpared in an at.id 
solution, with on}v the connective ris.tue left. Exl,lain 
how if was prepared. Bend it to show its pliability. To 
l,e of use in the l»,,lv it needs s,,me sui,stance to make it 
hard and rigid--the mineral marrer which was disso!ved 
out. 

NOTE.--This is an excellent time to show the necessity for 
bone-building minerai in the diet of babies and young children. 
If they do hot get this mineral substance during the growth 
period, they cannot have hard. rigid bones, and their bodies 
are apt to become misshapen--bow legs. curved spines, etc. 
This substance is also necessary for hard, sound teeth. 

Draw atteution to the fa,'t that the milmral matter in 
milk and eggs is iii solution, and theref,,re readv to bc use,] 
by the body. Mineral matter is hot in solution in ]OllO, 
and cannot be di¢solved bv the digestive çrocess, therefore 
it is practieally of no use as food. 
('ompare the connective tissue of bone with that of fat, 
and lef the pupils account for the difference in thickness. 
Lead them fo see that connective tissue can »e diss,,lved iu 
hot water, and in this wav mav be extracted from the 
minera] part of bone. The housekeeper mav do this her- 
self. or she mav buy it already extrm.tcd, as gelatine. 



190 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

5." Compositi«,n of muscle: 
(1) Connective tissue 
(2) ]ecl part, ruade up of microscopic tubes holding 
a rcd juice. The juiee contains: 
(a) Water 
(b Re,1 colour 
(c Flavour 
(,1) lus«]e a]bumcn--a protein sub- 
stance similar fo e.-white 
(,.} Minerai mattcr. 
It should be ruade clear that the walls of such tiny 
tubes ean never be tl,ick enough to be tougb. Attention 

lIuscle fibres highly magnified 
lundle of fibres. Tubes of one fibre. Proper carving of fibres-- 
across the grain. 
shouhl be called to the real cause of toughness--the thick 
connective ti.ue. 
NOTF.--Very small pieces of meat will serve for specimens. 
Tough meat is better, because it shows the connective tissue 
more plainly. When the muscle is being examined, it should 
be carefully scraped with a knife, until a layer of connective 
tissue is laid bare. The red part that is scraped off should 
be explained, and a drawing should be ruade to lllustrate it. 



MEAT 191 

3Iinced ]ean beef should be soaked in a litt]e cold vater 
for af lêast tventy minutes, fo extract the muscle j.uice for 
examination. The juice should be strained throl a 
eheeseeloth and poured into a glass. If shovs nothing but 
rater and a red colour. 
In order fo find the other substances, pour part of the 
juice into a small saueepan and heat it gradually until if 
boils gently. The red colour will disappear, an«l the al]m- 
men which is diss,lved in the jui.e will coaulate and 
beeome plainly visihle. The pupils will reeall that eg- 
white was affeeted in the saine wav I»v heat, and mav be 
told that this coagulated substance is similar to egg-white, 
and is ealled muscle alhumen. The o,hmr given off by 
heating suggests that the flavour i also in the muscle juiee, 
henee the importance of conserving thi juiee in the cook- 
ing proeess. 
Strain the boile¢l jfiee fo get rid .f the eoagulated albu- 
men and then examine the liquid that-is left. lts eolour 
plainly denotes mineral matter in solution. 

LESSOX II 
6. 3leat experiments : 
If rime permit, the following experiments mav be 
taken. The faets which these experiment. prove may, 
however, be developed in a much shorter rime bv ques- 

tioning : 

(2) 
(3) qprinkle a pieee of lneat with salt. 
pens ? 

('ut lean meat into slnall pieces, eover them with 
¢.o]d water aml let them stand. Note the e,h,ur 
of the watêr. 
('over a pieee of leau meat with boiling water 
let if stand. N»te the c«,lour of the water. 
What hap- 



192 HOUSEHOLD IIANAGEMENT 

(t-) Wrap a piccc of meat f,»r a few minutes in ordin- 
arv I»r«»'tt 'ral,ping-lal»er. What happens? 
(5) Simmer a small pic«.e of ery touzh meat fur 
al,,,ut an lmur a,d thon examine the connective 
tissue. 
(; Boil or bake a small piece of very touh meat 
and thym examim, the connective tissue. 

St.lc,.tion of meat: 
All flesh shou],l be uniform in eolour, of a fine 
grain, ami firm and springy fo the toueh. 
Beef sh«,u]«l i,c i,right red in ,.olour. well mottled. 
and surr«,undcd witb fat. 
3lutton shouhl I,e a du]] rod. ami its fat white, 
hard. and flakv. 
Lamb is lighter in col,ur than nmtton, and the 
bone is redder. 
Veal bas l,inkish-co]oured flcsh and white fat. 
Verv l,ale veal is hot good. 
I'«,rk sh«,a]d bave firm flesh of a pale red co]our. 
The skin sh«,u]d be white and e]ear, the fat 
white. 
l'ouhrv: 
(,t) Chiekens.Younz chickens have rhin, 
shar I, halls: sm,,,th ]es; s, dt. rhin skin ; 
ami soft cartilage at the end «,f the breast- 
],,me. L»n hairs dem,te agc. 
(b} Turkevs.Thee shou]d },e plump, have 
smooth, «]ark ]ces. anti sort cartilage. 
(e) Geese.These shou]d be p]ump an«l hare 
many pin feathers: tbc- sh,,uhl also lmvc 
pliai,]e i,ills and s, ft feet. 



lXIEAT 193 

8. ('are -f mea{: 
(1) P, cnmvc thc meat fr«,m the wrapping paper as' 
soon as it arrives, te, prevent the h,ss of juices. 
The I»ut«hcr sh«»uhl use waxcd pal)er next to 
ihe meat. 
(2) Wipe t]u' mt.at ail ,,ver with a ,l,mp ,-loth. but d,, 
hot put it int,» water. 
(3) Place thc meat cm an earthen «»r enamel dish, and 
set it in a eol place until require,l. 
(41 Fr»zen meat sh«»uhl l»e thawed in a wann r«»t»m 
before bcing cooked. 



194 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Cuts of beef 
1. Neck, stews nd soup. 2. Chuck ribs, cheaper 
roasu. 3. Prime ribs, very good toasts. 4. Loin, 
best steaks or toasts {sirloin, tenderloin, porter- 
bouse). 5. Rump, toasts and steak. 6. Brisket, 
stews or corned beef. 7. Fore shank, soup. 
8. Shoulder, stews or pot-toasts. 9. Short ribs, 
stews or cheap toasts. I[L Navel, corned beef. 
11. Plate, steu, s or corned beef. 12. Flank, stews or 
corned beef. 13. Round, steaks. 14. 2nd cut round, 
ste*s an4 soup. 15. Hind shank, stews d soup. 
16. Tail, soup. 

]ony structure 



MEAT" 195 

(2) Tbe connective tissue is ruade thick and tough by 
two causes.-- 
(a) Age--in old afimals the connective tissue 
has grown thiek. 
(b) Exercisein certain parts of file body, 
whcre muscles are much used, these 
muscles must be mooe firmlv bound 
t,gether, as in the neck and legs, etc. 
(3) Drv heat will hardel connective tissue, makinff if 
more dicult te eut and chew; therefore tough 
cuts should net be cooked in dry heat. 
(4) Moit heat will soften and finallv dissolve «onnec- 
rive tissue, making if easy te eut and chew; 
therefore tough cuts should be cooked in moist 
heat. 
(5) q'ouh meat is m,,re abun,lant in an animal' 
body, and is, theref.rc, chcapcr than tender 
meat. 
(6) Tmzh meat ha richcr jui«cs than tcn&.r nwat 
and should be used for soup, broth, and beef- 
tea. 

11. Digestibility of lneat: 
(l} The les.¢ muscle jui«e is (.ozlate,l by heat, the 
more easilv it is digested. 
(2) lq, ecaus «,f their ,'l,,se texture, thc liver, kidney, 
and heart of animals are more difficult te 
digest. 
(3) Mutt.n and lamh. he,-au:e «»f their shorter fibres, 
are more easily digested than beef. 
(4) Veal is difficult t, digest, owing te ifs stringy 
fibres. 



Cuts of lRrnb 



MEAT " 9 7 

(5) P,,rk has a large anmunt of fat intermil|gled with 
ifs fibres, and is. therefore, difficult fo digest. 
(6) ('hickel and turkev are easily digestcd, but g,,ose 
and du,.k are indigestible, be,'ausc of the fat 
through thc musrlc fil,res. 
(7) (;ame is easv -f digestion. 
The pra«ti«.al w.rk, hesides the exl,erimet, in 
tion with the meat lessons, should consist .f af lcast three 
preparations of this fo««l: (1 the c««,kiug of tender 
meat, (2) the eookiug .f t,ugh mcat, (3) thc making of 
soup. 
] /  f ..-- 
Cuts of pork 

The ohjeet of each preparation should l,e ruade plain. 
so that the pui)il. mav fullv uuder.tald what they are 
trying fo accompli.h. 

1. Object in cookiug tender meat: 
(1 } To change the flavour and appearance. 
(2) To seal the tubes to. keep in the juice.. 
(3) To e««,k tho meat with,,ut dt.nselv eoaulating 
the pr-tein of the muscle juice, so as fo keep 
if digestil,le. 
14 



19 IOUSEHOLD lYIANAGEMENT 

2. Objeet in eooking tough meat: 
bl 2) To change the flavour and appearanee. 
) To soften and partially dissolve the connective 
tissue, making it ea.y fo eut. 
. (.3) To avoid making the muscle juiee indigestible. 
3. Ohjeet in nlaking soup: 
(1) To extraet the connective tissue from the bone. 
(2) To extraet the nlusele juiee from the tubes. 

GENEI:XL I:ULES FOI1 COOKING IEAT 
1. Baking : 
l'lace the meat in a 'er" hot oven with pieces of the 
fat or some dripping in the pan. Baste every 
ten minutes. Keep the oven very hot for a smaI1 
toast. For a large roa.,t, check the tire after the 
first fifteen miuutes. /3ake fifteen minutes to 
eaeh pound. 
2. Broiling- 
(1) Oxer the eoals.--Put the meat between the hot 
greased wires of a broiler. Place over a very hot, 
elear tire. Turn the broiIer every ten seconds. 
Beef one ineh thick eooks rare in eight minutes. 
(2) Pan Broiling.--HeaI a fr.ving-pan smoking hot. 
Lav the lneat in fiat: turn constantlv until 
seared, then frequently, as in broiling, but do 
hot pieree the muscle part with a fork. Beef one 
ineh thick eooks rare in ten minutes. 
3. Boiling : 
Cover the meat with boilin water. Boil rive minutes. 
Then simmer until done. Tender meat akes 
twenty minutes tu the pound; tough meat takes 
from three fo rive hours. 



FISH 199 

4. Stewm, : 
Cut the nwat in pi'es of a suitable size. Cover with 
cold water. P, ring gradually tot, he Silnmering 
point and silnmer until tender, usuallv thr¢e or 
four hours. Keep the pot ch,sely covered. 
5. Beef juiee: 
Take one pound of steak froln the t,»p of the rolm,l. 
W/pe the steak, relnove ail fat, and eut the leal 
lneat in small pieces, l'lace iii calming jar, al,d 
coxer: place on a rest in the kettle and surr,und 
wi/h eold water. Alh,w the water t- heat slowlv. 
eare being takel, llot to have it rcaeh a higher 
/emperature than 130 degrees. I.et stand two 
hours; strain and press the ineat to obtain ail 
the juiees. Salt fo taste. 
NoTE.--These rules may be dictated to the class, as ail of 
the prineiples whieh they involve bave been previously dis- 
cussed. 
FISH 
Since fish is the flé]l of sea aniinals, there will be little 
new fo learn eoneerning if. 
[ain points of difference between /his flesh and 
ordinarv lneat are: 
1. Fish is less stilnulating and nourishing than meat, 
as if e,ntains m,,re water and less protein than an 
equal quan/ity of lean meat. 
2. Oysters, and the elass ealled white-fish, are more 
eaily digested tllan meat, henee they shouhl be 
chosen for invalids or those having weak dige»tions. 



200 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

Kinds of fi.-:h: 
1. Whitc-fi.h.--T]m fat i. .tored mostlv in the Iiver, 
makin th,. fl,.h casv t,» dicst. Examplcs: 
halibut, had,h)rk, white-fish. 
2. Oih" fish.The fat is distributed throuhout the 
th.»h, maki,g it m,,re ,iil5«ult to digest. Examples: 
salm(m, hcrring, mackcrcl. 
3. Shell-fi»h.],ccause of their ch,se fibres, these are 
diti,.u]t t- ,]izet. with the exception of oyters. 
Examlde«: vlams, scalh,l,S, and ovster. 
4. t'ru»ta«.eous.The flc»h is tough and hard fo digest. 
Examples" h_,bsters, crabs. 
Seleeti«,n t,f fish: 
Fresh fish mav be ree«»gnized by the following: 
1. The ex'es sh«,ubl b«, full and bright. 
2. The llesh should be firm and elastie. 
3. The ill sh«mld be briht red. 
4. There slmuld be no Ulq,h.aant odour. 
('o,kin «f fish : 
Fish mav he e-,ked iii any way similar fo meat. 
the flesh of fish eontains fo,d substances whieh are very 
easilv dissolved in water, boiling is hot a good method 
«,f eooking to ehoose for this food. Steaming, baking, and 
frying are more suitab]e. 

GELATINE 

A le..¢on on gelatine naturally f,_,llows the lessons on 
meat and fish. The studv of bone and the making of soup 
have exldained the source of this substance, and onlv a fexv 
additional facts are neee.sarv. 



GELATINE 201 

The gelatine praetiee dishe. are sure to prove attrac- 
tive fo the class, and the ,ronron use of this fmd in sic.k- 
ness, and in salads and desserts, makes if important that 
ifs food vahe be understood. 

1. Source of gelatine: 
(elatine ix obtained fr«,m the lmnes, cartilage, and skin 
of animais. It is the connective tissue dissolved out of 
these parts. 
The housekeeper mav obtain if f,»r herself or she nlay 
buv if already extraeted; both are equally good. 

". ('onmere.ia| f¢}rnls: 
(1 } Sheet elatine 
(2) Shredded elatine 
(3) Granulated gelatine. 

3. Properties of gelatine: 
(l) It ,oftens in cold rater, but will not dissolve. 
(2) It dissolves in h,t water. 
(3) It jellies when eold, if the solution be suffieiently 
strong. 
(4) Good gelatine has little ta.te, colour, or odour. 
and no sedinlent when dissolved. 

4. Steps in dissolving gelatine: 
(1) Put a small ara,tant of cold water or anv c-hl 
liquid on gelatine, and let it stand until the 
liquid is absorbe,l. 
(2/ A01d a boiling liquid and stir tll,»r«mzllly until 
di.solved. 



202 HOUSEHOI,D MANAGEMENT 

5. Value in the diet: 
(1) Gelatine is a nitrogenous suhstance, Imt cannot 
«,f itself huild ris:ueo, as mo.t protein foods do. 
When eaten, if vill save the tissues already 
making up the l»ody, hence i. called a protein- 
spa re r. 
(9. It is verv ea.*ilv dirested, and for thi. reason if 
,dites a pleasant varietv fo the diet of an 
invalid. 
(:11 It makes an attraetix'ê dessert at the end of a 
substantial meal, without adding mueh nutri- 
ment. 

C,. Wavs ¢,f using gelatine: 
(1) It mav a..ist in making soup. 
(2) Anv liquid mav be n:ed te, dis.olve this sub- 
.Ian«e to make a plain jelly. Examples: eoffee 
jelly, tomato jelly, wine jelly. 
(3) Plain jelly mav he varied a. follows: 
A]low the plain je]ly mixture to cool until it 
i. as thick as «.ream. ad then beat in whipped 
eg,.--white. «,r fruit, af «.lmppèd ve,.etables, and 
set awav until firm. Examples: show pudding, 
orange eharhtte, vegeIable salad. 
(4) ,qti'ain off the juiee from a ean of fruit, heat 
if. and use if 5,r diss«,hin the ge]atine. Whën 
almost set. add the fruit, and set away fo 
become firm. 



FROZEN DISHES 203 

FROZEN DISHES 

A lesson on frozen dishes may be taken af any rime, 
'but it seenlS specially opportune after the gelatine lesson. 
It may be impossible to make these di.hcs in school, but 
the facts of the ]es.on mav be discussed and recipes fur- 
nished, after which a Form IV pupil should find no diffi- 
cultv in carrying out these recipes at home. 
Elcmentarv s¢.ien«e should be corrc}atctl, to exl)lain the 
use of salt in the freezing lwoces.. 

VALUE OF FROZEN DISItES 
l. They are cooling, refre.hing, and nourishing when 
properly aken: thev are hot g«»od as a final course 
at a meal, as cold mixtures rcduce the temperature 
of the stomach and thus retard dige.tion. 
2. Thev are appetizing in appearance aud flavour. 
3. They are economical as regards cost of ingredients, 
fuel, rime, and energy. 

I. Water }ce.--Fruit juice di]uted with water, sweetened 
and frozen: stirçed about everv five minutes whi]e 
freezing. 
2. Frappé.--Water ice frozen (o the consistent?" of 
mush: in freezi'nz, equal part., of ice and salt are 
used to make the mixture granular. 
3. Sherbet.Water ice fo which i. addcd a small quan- 
itv of dissolved gelatine or beaten egg-white; 
stirred constantly while freezing. 
4. Ice cream.--Thin cream, sweefened, flavoured, and 
frozen; stirred constantly whi]e freezing. 



204 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

5. Plain ice cream.--Same as ice cream with custard 
added. 
6. Mousse.--Thick cream, heaten until stiff, sweetened, 
flavoured, placed in a mouhl, pat.ked in i¢e and 
sait {tu-o parts ice to one part sait), and allowed 
t,, stand threê hours. A small quantity t,f dissohed 
gelatine mav be added t» the mixture. 

PRACTICAL WOIiK 
1. Freezing : 
(1} .';«.ald the «an and dasher and cool just bef«,re 
using. 
(2} Sée that ail part, of the freezer are properly 
a,lju»ted. 
(3) Empty the mixture into the can: never fill the 
can more than thrce-quarters full. to alhw 
for exl, ansi«,n when freezing. 
(4) l'repare iee 1,v (.hipping finelv or bv erushing in 
a ca,as I,ag by m.a,s «,f a mallet. 
(5 Allow three meaures of ice fo one of coarse 
rock sait and pa«k this mixture solidlv 
around the can. 
(6) Turn the erank slowlv and steadilv until the 
mixture begins fo freeze, then turn more rap- 
idly until frozen. 
(7) Add mv, re i«e and sait as needcd, but (1« hot 
draw off the sait water except fo, keep if from 
getting inside the tan. 



PLANNING OF MEALS 2{)5 

2. Packing : 
(1) When the lnixture is frozen, draw off the wafer, 
remove the dasher, and pack the contents of 
the ean down solid|y with a spoon. 
(2) Replace the eover, u.inga eork for the opening, 
then repack in iee and sait (four parts iee fo 
one part sait). 
(3) Cover with newspapers, blanket, or earpet, and 
let if stand for at lea:t «»ne hour before serving. 

3. Moulding : 
(1) Wet the mouhl and pack the frozen mixture in 
solidlv. 
(2) Place the cover .n the mould and bind strip. 
of greased cotton or waxed paper around ail 
the cre'ices. 
(3) Imbed the mould in ice and sait (four parts 
ice fo one part alt). 
(4) Wrap a el«,tb wrung from hot water ar.und 
the mould for an instant, bef.re removing the 
mixture. 

PLANNING AND PREPARATION OF MEALS 

The food work of the previou. Form., from constant 
referenee ami u:e, sh«mhl be se» well k,mwn that it nmv 
be reviewed in one lesson, under the following heads: 
l. Uses of food 
2. Neeessarv substances in food 
3. Composition of the conlmon foodsnlilk, eggs, meat, 
vegetables, fruit, seeds 
4. çleneral s¢,urces of each food substance. 



206 I-IOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

After the review, the clas. mav he asked fo prepare 
menus for one day's meals, keeling in mind the following: 
1. ]ai]v balance o1' ïo»d sub.tances 
2. Appetizing appearancc an« flawmr of the food 
3. Ec(momy of /ime, labour, and nmnev in providig 
thc food. 

The preparation «,f menu.¢ ma S l)e eontinued, even 
while ,ther w(wk is being studied, until the teacher feels 
stisliel with 
intellimtly. 
The ldamin of menus shou]d, if lime permit, be 
extendcd t, a,-tual practice in preparing and serving the 
meals ealled for bv some of the menus. In this Form 
l]wrc slmuld Ic a limit set t» the number of people scrved 
and the cost of the 
Sinee 1,reakfast and luncheon were prepared in the 
Junior Form, a dhmer hould he taken in this. The 
entire reponsibi]ity ,f the meal shouhl be given fo the 
pupi], em.h bein appointed fo perform definite duties. 
The teaeher mav advie while the ela is plalming the 
work, but not asist while it is hcing «.arried 
Ea«h memler of the elas lnav be asked o prepare a 
menu to suit the slc«ial emclitions which haxe been nlade 
as f, numher ami «ot. These mav I»e planned af lu»me 
and hr«mht t, the teacher for criticism. At the first 
]esson. ]roe or 5)nf f the I»est mav l»c written on the 
black-board for comparison and choice. 
When the selecti«»n is ruade, members of the clas 
shouhl he ehsen 5r the 5,11mving duties: (1) marketing. 
(2) preparation of food, (3) laying the table, (4) serving. 
(5) representing members of the family fo eat the meal. 



PREPARAT]ON OF IEALS 207 

NOTE.--To prevent any suspicion of favouritism, the dutieu 
may be written on slips of Pal)er and the pupils allowed to 
draw these. 

At thc second lesson the meal will be prepared, served, 
and caten. In scools laeking an equipment, the mcal may 
be planned and seleeted in the saine way as above, but 
the entire resp«msibility ¢,f carrying if out must rest on crue 
pupil, as it will he nece.,sary for each to prepare and serve 
it in hcr own home. 



('IIAPTER XII 
FORM IV: SENIOR I;IL_I)E (f'ontinued) 
INFANT FEEDI \'( 

"!'. subje«.t is more suitable 
t],ose attending the puhlic ad st, parate sello,s, but, be- 
«-au.e of its importam.e aml the fact that mauv girl. never 
ro I,evond t]lC Entraee «la... it i. deenled wise te present, 
te the pupils «,f F«rm IV, tht. main fa«t. rclating te the 
h.edb,Z «,f infant.. Eat.h tea«her mu.t howerer use her 
jud:zment lu the choiee of the.e faets for hêr cla.s and in 
the metlmd of preseti»z thenl. The instruction given 
mav im.ludê the f, il,,win,,., idea.: 
q'he ,atural ri,,1 «,f al infant i. it. mother's milk, and 
t,o mu«.h stress ea,n«,t l,e placo,l on the necessity of nurs- 
ing I,v the m«,ther. 
Ever, if the mother ha. hut a small supply, the bahy 
should ,ot he weancd: the supply sh,,nhl be supplemented 
I,v nmdified milk. In the rare caso. where a mother ean- 
n«,t nur.e lwr l,aby, a |hysicia9 sh,»uhl pre.«.ribe the food. 
In sm.h a «a.e tire I,est sul».titute i. ,'ow's milk. 
If eç,w'. milk ho used, it wili haro t, he ehanged or 
'" m«,dified" « make it as far as p.sible like mother's 
milk. f'«w's milk differs in the fi»llowing re.peets: If 
1,as (1) less water and therefi,re more solide; (e) a larger 
pr«,porti«,n of protein and miueral compounds; (3) less 
sugar; (1) a different combirmtion of fat.. 
f'ow's milk canner he ruade like m«,ther's milk. hut it 
is hetter food for a litt|e l,abv if «ream. milk sugar, and 
harlev water, are added in certain proportions, varying 
aceording te tire age of thc child. 



INFANT FEEDING 20 

RE('II'E Fo)Il AIODIFIED AIILK 
Milk î OUllOes 
Mi]k suTar ½ -unr-e 
('ream (18cA) 1 ,,um.c, if ,,rdinarv milk he used «,r { .unce 
if .h.rsov milk be used. 
Barley water Dilut,. with harlev water t,, nlake ¢t «,unces 
f.r th«. first tw,, ,,r three wceks, then 
redu,-c te, 1[; oum.cs ll» «» ab,ut three 
nlOIIt}ls «,f axt,. The '«,ltIHl«' nlaV then 
I,o redue-c.,1 t. 1 I t»UlleS, and af rive or 
six lOllths t» 12 «,une.es. 
Mixed milk. ami llt,f Olle çow's lnilk, sh,uhl 1,e used, 
for the reason that a better averae «,f milk is seeured 
from several cows tban from one. The supp]y slmuld 
be fresh and t-lean. To make sure «,f the latter, scrupul,us 
eare sh«,uld be given to the cleanliness of the oows' bodies 
and stahles, the utensils, and the ch,thin and ha»ds of 
the milkers. If there is anç douht of the cleanliness, the 
milk should he pasteurized. Ths ImSteurization greatly 
reduees the ha«-terial lire in the milk I,v a temperature 
wbich does llot chane its compositi.n and digestibility, as 
is the case in sterilizing if. 

DI/Et'T/OXS FO P.t.'STErlIIZIX( MILK 
Sterilize b,ttles as for Cllning. Nearlv fill the bottles 
with milk and cork them with ahs,rhent e-tton whieh bas 
heen sterilized {bv being haked a delieate brown). [Place 
the bottles on a test in a deel» kettlv and surrou/t] them 
with e,hl water as hih as tire laiilk. Heat flic water 
ora«lually to 155 degree. Fahrenheit. or until tin..," hulbles 
show in the milk next the #ass. emove tbe kettle and 
««»lrIenL fo where tire temperaure of tire milk will remain 



210 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

the saine f,)r half an hour. Then co, d the milk quickly 
hy putting the hottles first lu lukewarm water aud then 
in cold water. Keep in a ««ol place and d, n,t rÇmove 
the çll{{(lll until ready b, uso Pasteuriz(,d milk should hot 
I»e kept m,,re tlmn a e»ulde of davs. 
The utm-st eare a«l elenliness shouhl be .hserved in 
prepari»g lhc idant's f,,,,]. 11 utensils whi«h c, mm in 
contm. with the f,,,d sh,mld be sterilized em-h lime they 
re use& Botth.s with ruld,(.r tubes shouhl never be use& 
as tlwy canno/ be /h-r.ugly «lcaned. "l'he bottle shouhl 
be plain and graduated without a net.k, and the nipple 
slumhl adroit ,f being turned inside out. 

('..ltE OF BOTTLES 

After the nur.i.,.s, the I,,ttles sh,,uld af once be rinsed 
with cold water. Later. tho I»,,ttles and nipples should be 
,.arefullv washed in h,t, s,,apy water, theu rinsed in clear, 
h,,t water. T]leV shouhl then I,e sterilized l,v }«>i]ilg in 
water fi,r twcntv minutes, aftcr whid tllev mav ho ldaeed 
in Iri. m'il s,luti,n (1 tsp. t. 1 qt, water), or the 
hottles may be eml»tied and plugged with sterilized 
ahsorl»cnt cotton until again rcquircd. 

('ARE OF FO(H} 

It saves mu,-.h time t,» make suflïcient food fo last for 
twentv-four hours. This mav 1,e lmt into a large bottle, or 
what is better, into the several nursiug bottles, and each 
pluggcd with sterilized al)sorhent cotton. Aftcr coding, 
the bottles should bc put on the ice or lu s)mc cool place 
until required. Whcre there is n refrigrator, an icc-box 
nmde on the prin«ilde of the h,me-made tîreless cooker will 



INFANT FEEDING 211 

do excellent service. When the f,,,»,l s fo be used, it shou]d 
be warmed slight]).  above body heat by placing the bottle 
in warn water. 

The folh,wing table is taken from The C'are and Feed- 
ing of ('hihb'«n bv L. Emet Ih,lt, M.D., ,,f New York. 

S('IlEDULE FOR FEI':I}ING A HI.:ALTIIY ClllLD 
DUl:IXG TIIE FIRST YEAR 

Age 

2nd to 7th day ..... 
2nd and 3rd weeks. 
4th t» 6th week... 
71h week fo 3 mos., 
3 to 5 months ..... 
5 to 7 months ..... 
7 to 12 months .... I 

ttours 
 2 
• 3 1 
4 oo 

k)uatity 
for oI/e 
feeding 

Uuantity 
for 24 
hours 

7-14 
14-24 
21-28 
25-35 
27-36 
33-39 
3.5-43 



('HAPTER XIV 

FORM IV: ,";ENIIII I',Ik'tl)E (t'«,ntinuod) 

ll U,'.;EII{)I,I) SANITATION 

A.s "rn lrinviph.s «,f sanitati«m are bascd on a know- 
]«dgo «,f I,a«.tvria. tho favts c«,n«ernitt thesc mi«roscol»ic 
plants, whi«.), wore taught it the ]es.on on the "Pre- 
servati«,n ,,f F,,od ", bave on]v to be reviewed and extended. 

The f,»ll,wing t,,l,it's should I,c quickly reviewed: 
1. Iescril,tion of ba«-teria 
2. ceurrenoe of ba«t0ria 
3. Favourable conditions for bacteria 
-1. Multiplication of bacteria 
5. Vseful bacteria 
6. Ilarmftd bacteria. 

It is with the harmful I,aeteria that our lesson on 
sanitatio deals. The pupils already know that some 
kinds },elonging fo this class cause the decay of food, and 
now they are readv to be tohl that other harmful kinds 
«,f microscopic plants gain entrance to our bodies and 
.ause disease, f'oncerning these, the following outline 
,,f facts shouhl be taken: 

1. MEANS OF BACTERIA ENTERING THE BODY 

(1) Through the resl,irah,ry organs 
(2) Through the digestive tract 
(3) Thrt, ugh the broken skin. 
212 



DISEASE-PRODUCING BACTERIA 213 

2. COMMON DISEASE-PRODUCING BACTERIA 
(l) Those entering the respiratory organs.--Mumps, 
scarlet fever, whooping-cough, diphtheria, 
measles, pl]eUlnOl]ia 
(e) Those entcril|g the digestive tract.--Typhoid, 
('holcra. tuber«ulosis 
(3) Those ce,rein.,.,, through cuts, etc.--Skin diseases 
like ringworm, blood poisoning, lockjaw 
(tetanus). 

VP 
Sink and sewer connection 
T--Trap. V£--V'aste pipe. H.D.--House drain. S.--Sewer. 
If housekeepers do hot excr(-ise care, these disease- 
produ('ing bacteria mav enter thc h»mo, and finding there 
all the conditions which thcv require, they will nmltiply, 
and beeome a menace to the family. 



214 I-IOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

3. METHODS OF SANITATION 
Since bacter]a are too sma]] fo be seen, t s verv hard 
dea] with them. The housekeeper bas the fo]lowing 
wavs ,,f pr,,tecting the hou.eh«,Id : 
{ l ) Er having ail drain pipes trapped : 
(2) P,v keepi,g the l,.use free from l,»dzing plat.es 
for baeteria : 
(a) lçeep the house elean and ïree of dust. 
(b) Wash garl»age }»ails and sinks daily and 
seald them and drain pipes at least once a 
(«) Keep the refrigerators, cul,b,»ar,ls, and rê- 
cepta«les for food elean, and allow no 
sl»,iled food to remain in them. 
(dl W«.h nd sterilizê the soiled elothing once 
a wPk. 
(el Keep the eellar well aired and elean; allow 
no deeaying material o remain in it. 
(/) Neep the d«»or-yards elean; allow no seraps 
«,f food. elenin.z water, or sweepings fo 
be thrown near the housê. 
(3) Bv kccping the sui,p1S of fo,d from disease- 
I, roducing baetcri " 
(a) ['se sereens to keep out files, whieh transfer 
baeteria fr«m their hodies to food. 
(bi Wash fresh fruit and egetables before 
using. 
(c) Boil f,»r twenty minutes water of doubtful 
purity. 
(t) Bv keeping the bodies of the ïamilv stron. and 
healthy, so that if ba,.teria gain an êntraneê 
they will be resisted and ovêreome: 



METHODS OF DISINFECTING 215 

(a} Provide well-balanced, nutriti«»us food. 
(b) Supply suitable clothing to protect the 
bodv. 
(c) See that there is an abundant supply of 
ïresh air, night and day. 

4. DISPOSAL OF WASTE IN VILLAGES A.'D RURAL 
DISTRICTS 
(1) Burn all combustible material. 
(2) Burv tin.-_-, broken dishes, etc. 
(3) Fced refuse f,»od t,» animals «»r empty it int,» a 
pit dug f,»r thc purp,»:c, and ,-,»ver with a 
laver of earth ïr,»m rime t,» rime. 
(-i) Throw slop watcr at a distance from the hou.e 
and well, and plant stalky growths like sun- 
flowers, which ab»,»rb the waste. 

5. METHODS OF DISINFECTING 
Where bacterial disea:e is known fo ex-ist, the utmost 
care should be taken to subject eerything that has corne 
in contact with the patient to a proce.-:s which will kill 
the di.¢ease-producing plants. (n]y two ways of doing 
this are known: 
(1) Subject the bacteria to extreme heat which will 
kill them 
(a) Burn everythingthat can be burned. 
(b) Boil bed and body linen. 
(c) Scald dishes. 
(d) Scald or bake utensils. 
(2) Use chemicals  destrov the germs 
(a) Use chemical solutions fo wash surfaces, 
materials, or utensils. 



216 HOUSEIqOLD blANAGEMENT 

(bi ,";cal the r«,«,m. aml burn (-hcmica]s to pro- 
du«c Vl,«»urs wbich will destr«,v bacteria. 
NoTE.--Directions for the use of chemicals are given under 
the lesson on " Home Nursing ". 

Tbis part «»f thc w-rk does n,t require a special equip- 
m.nt, th-ugh it is an advantage te» havc (me. An in- 
zeni.us teaeher, with the co-,,l)eration of ber pupils, will 
im'ent plans for l»roridig whatever is necessary for 
dem«,ntrati«,n, l'upils livin 7 near the school tan supply 
manv «,f the needed n,aterial. 
A d.ll and doll's bed mav I,e used fo teach I,ed making 
.nd tbe elmnffing «,f l»ed-clotbing while the patient is in 
bed. The doll mav alsr» be used t,» illustrate the method 
«»f giving a patient a bath in bed and of ehanging the 
body elothing, if sueh infi»rmation is desired. 
In s.me cases, a mnual training pul)il might con- 
stru«t the hed. and the sewing ela»s the mattress, bed- 
clothing, and doll's underwear. If this were the prorty 
«,f the s«h.r,1, the girls «ouhl take turns in making the 
bed eerv dav and in laundering the clothing at home 
»llt'e fl week. 
It is desirable that the intructi.n in home mrsin. 
be given in two Iessons. These mav be outlined as follows: 

LESSON I 

TIIE 8I('K ROOM 
1. Location.--The room shouh| be «,n /he sunnv side 
the house and Ire as large and airv as possible. Thc 
t«»p floor is quieter, but neces,¢itates manv step.¢. 



HO1ME NURSING 217 

2. Furnituro.--All furniture sh,»uhl a,lmit ,,f casv 
«leanim..,. .";mail rugs are I,.tter than a carl,et, as 
thcy (.au bc easilv rem,,ved f,,r cleanin. In infecti(,us 
diseases, mdv I,are necessitics shouhl be kel,t in the 
rltOlll. 
The bed slmuhl be single an,l place,l 
accessible fr, m I.,th sides. It sh«,uhl be high enough 
fo prevent the nurse st,,,l, inT. The 
shouhl I,e of light weight and washa},lc. 
A bedside table shoul,l bc l,rovidcd, a]s,, a couch 
for the nurse. A screen wiil be f-und ucful fo prc- 
vent draughts and fo shade the lih/. 

3. Venti}ation.--A thermometer should be used, and the 
temperature kept at 65 de7rees to 68 degrees, or, iaa 
special diseases, at.cording to the doct,,r's ,,rder.. 
An abundant supply of fresh air should be pro- 
vided day and night. To secure this, there must be 
two openings, one to adroit pure, fresh air. and the 
other fo let out the impure air. Thcse opcnin:zs are_ 
preferably on oppo.ite sides of the ro¢,m and at 
different heights. If there is onlv one window, it 
should be ruade fo «,pen af both top and bott,-,m. In 
extreme cases, an adjoining r,-m nmy he airvd and. 
after the fresh air is warm, it mav be admitted to 
the sick room. 

4. Care.--The roc, m sht)uld be kept verv elean and neat. 
Ail eleaning should l,e quiotly de,ne, 
annoy or disturb the patient. The fl,-«,r, wood-work, 
and furniture sh,uhl be duste,1 with a damp «loth. 
Flowers shmd,1 he rêmoved af night and should 
have fre.h water dailv. 



218 }IOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

No food or nwdieine sh,,uld he h.ft 
,";«,ih.«l dishes ,,r ,.I,,Ihing sh«,uld he rt.m,,ved as soon 
as l,ossil,h, and. if, ,-as,.s ,,f it,fe«-ti,,us dis,.ascs, pla,.cd 
in water cm,taining a ,lisinfectaut. 
Ail excreta shou}d he taken away imn, cdiately and, 
if ne,.essary, disinfc'tcd beh»re I,ei,,g emptivd. 

/,IETIIODS OF DISINFE('TIXG 
l. ])ishés or ,.h,thing.---(l) Make a s, dution using one 
1,art of carl»,]ic a,'id t- twcnty parts of water (six 
t«.asp,)o,fu]s t,, a pit,t of water) and let if stand for 
haif an ]mur. S,,ak t]w arti('h.s h, this f,,r two h,,urs. 
2) Use f«,rma]in a,.eording to directions. (3) Use 
hi(.hloridc tal,l,:ts a,'cordinz t,, directions. (This turns 
d,,thes y,,]h,w. ) 
NoTn.--These solutions must be renewed every twenty- 
four hours, if exposed to the air. 

2. Ex«reta.--{',,ver the exereta with one nf the above 
solutions and a]],w it t- stand for haif an hour be- 
f,,re emptying. 

LESSON I I 

TIIE PATIENT 

1. ('are of the bcd.--The bed of a sick person should be 
kept specially clean and fresh. The linen should be 
chanzed evcrv day. or (,ftencr if soi]cd. Where the 
supply of linen i. limited, or wherc lhere is pressure 
of w«,rk, a go«,d airing and sunninz mav oeeasiona]lv 
take the place of ]aundering. 
In makin. the hed, it shouhl be kept in rein,1 
that the under sheet requires unusual tucking in at 



HOME NURSING 219 

thc head. t, prevcnt it., slippinz d,»wn and 
wrinkicd. The uppcr she«.t shou/d receive "extra 
attention at the foot, as itis apt te) pull up. 
When changing the sheets with the patient in 
bed, work as dcftlv and qtictly as 1,«,ssil,lc. llave 
the (h,an sheets warmcd and the r«,«,m c«)mforfal,ly 
heated. Begin with the under slwet as 
(1) To change the under sheet.Turn the patient 
over on the side awav from y«.u and fold the 
soiled sheet in fl«t folds close to the body. Lay 
the clean sheet, on the side of the hed near 
you, tuck it in. and f[dd hall «)f it againt the 
roll of soiled sheet, s,. that I)«th ean be slipped 
uuder the hody at once. Turn the patient 
back to the opposite side, on the clean sheet, 
pull out the soiled sheet, and tuek the clean 
che smoothly in place. 
(2) To change the ul,per sheet.L«,osen ail the 
clothes at (he foot of the I,ed. Spread a clcan 
sheet and I.lanket, wr«,ng side up, on top of 
he other bedch, thes. Pin the cleau clothes 
af the head of the bed or jet the patient 
hold them. Graduallv slip d«,wn and draw 
out the soiled sheet and blnket. Tuck ail in 
place. 

?. Care of the diet.--Reeoverv from sickness in many 
cases depend. more upon the riht kind of food than 
on medicine. The importance of proper diet should 
bave been impressed on the minds of the pupils by 
their lessous on food, in the Junior C,rade «tf Form 
IV. They may now be shown that, in siekness, the 



220 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

responsibi]ity of the choice of food is transferred 
from the patient to ihe do«.tor or nurse, llence if is 
most important that a person acting as nurse should 
be trained in food alues and proper methods of 
«.ookin. She shouid also be capable of exereising 
daintiness and arti.¢tie ski]l in servig, so that the 
appearance of the food may tempt the patient to 
(,«fl if. 

Invalid's tway 

If should not be necessary fo review the comparative 
values of the we]]-known foods or the best metho¢]s of 
applying heat fo make and keep these foods digestible; 
it mav he taken for granted that tbe cla.s remembers 
these facts. The rime mav be more profitab]y used in 
namin._-, and discussinz special dishes whieb are inc]utled 
in invalid cnnkerv. Reripes may be given for anv of these 
which the pupi|s desire or the teacher chooses, and one or 
two of the «]ishes whicb require very ]itt]e rime fo make, 
mav be prepared. 



HOME NURSING 221 

For the sake of eonvenienee, diet. for the siek nmy 
},e c]as.«ified as Mil1,', Liquid. Light. and Full. These 
terres are an easv wav of indicating a certain range of 
foods. 
Milk Diet.Milk, butter-milk, koumyss, kephyr. 
NoTE.--Lime-water may be given with sweet mllk, one 
part to threo of milk. 
Liquid Diet.Milk diet, beef juice or beef-tea, broths, 
gruels, and sometimes jelly. 
Light Diet.Soup, white mct of fowl, white fish, 
oysters, soft-cooked eggs, custard, mi]k puddings, fruit, 
gelatine jellies. 
Full Diet.--Any food that is not particularly hard fo 
digest. 
NoTE.--Plenty of water should be given in all diets. 

POULTICES 
A poultiee is used to reduee inflammation and should 
be as large as the affeeted part. 

q'he kinds in ordinarv use are: 
1. Mustard poultice, u.¢ed as a counter irritant. 
2. Linseed, bread, or potato poultice, used fo soothe. 

Direetions for a mustard poultice: 

1. For a very .¢trong poultiee, mix pure mu,¢tard to a 
paste with warm water; spread on a piece of 
cheesecloth or muslin, leaving a margin of an 
inch: fold over the margin, and cover with thicker 
cotton or paper. 



222 

HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

. FJr mihler l«,ulti«.es use flour t« reduce the mustard 
as foliows : ' 
(1} 1 part flour fo 1 part mustard 
(? 2 parts flour fo 1 part mustartl 
{3) 3 parts fl«,ur fo 1 ]»art mustard. 

Directi,»t,s f,r linseed, i,read, or potato pou]tices: 
['se l,oiling water to mix the above fo the consistency 
of thiok p, rridge, and spread as in the mustard 
poultice, exceptin that the layer of poultice is 
ruade much thicker, in «,rdcr fo retain the moisture 
and heat. 

FOMENTATIOXS 
These are much the saine in their effects as poultices, 
but are som,:tin}es mnre convénient. 

Directions fo fomcntations: 

Si,read a towel over a large basin, place a flannel in 
the t«wel and pour boiling hot water over it. Fold 
the t,wel over the flannel, gather the dry encls of 
the towel in either hand. and wrin. Oarry to the 
patient, shake out the flatmel, and apply. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 
THE FOLLOWINI; I,,,,,k. are re,-,,mmende,1 for referenee, 
the more useful i,eing marked with ail a:terisk: 

THE IIoIE 
Furnishing of a M«,dest Ih«ne. IJanie|s. $1.o. Alkinon, 
Mentzner & ('o., New Y,»rk. 
Ilome Decoration. l'riestman, $1.5o. Whiteomb & 
Barrows, Boston. 
*('are of a IIouse. Clark, 81.5o. The Macmillan Com- 
pany of Canada, Ltd., Toronto. 

SCIENCE AND SANITATIO 
*Elemêntary Househol,1 ('hemistrv. .nêll. $1.5. The 
5Iacmillan I'.mpany of l'anada, lad., T,,r,,nto. 
Chemi.try of ('ookinz and ('leaning. I',ichards and 
E]liott, $1.o. Whitcomb & Barrows. 
Fuels of the Household. White, îSc. Whitcomb & 
Barrows, Boston. 
*Storv of (;erre Life. Conn, 35c. Whitcomb & Barrows, 
Boston. 
*Hou.ehold Foes. Ravenhi]|, ,5c. M,.('|elland, C, ood- 
chihl & Stewart. Ltd., Tor,nto. 
*The ,,uree, ('hemistry; and Usc .f F«««I Pr.dut't:. 
Bailey, .$1.;5. Blakiston, S,,n & ('o., Phi]ade]pbia. 

FOOD çND DIETETIC.q_ 
*Food Produet.. Sherman, $2.0. The Macmillan Com- 
pany of Canada, Ltd., Toronto. 
Fo¢«| Materials and their Adulteration.¢. Richards, 
$1.0. Whitcomb & P, arrow.¢, Boston, 
223 



224 HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT 

:::F««»d and ])iet(.ti(.s. lluWhi..n, $3.m. Wm. Wood & 
I'.., 51 Fifih Avenue, Xew Y«trk, N.Y. 
l'rim.ildes «tf ||uman Nutrition. ,hwdan, $1.75. The 
Maemillan (',mpauy «tf (_'anada, Ltd., Toronto. 
*{'are and Feedinz,f ('bi|drcn. ])r. Emmet Ht|t, 75c. 
!. Ap])ht»n, N.Y. (M«.Ainsh, Ttr«,nto) 
('are of the Bahv. Ilr..1. P. C. Griffith, $1.5. W.B. 
S;mnd«rs & ('o., l'bilade]pbia. 
A Litt]é Talk about the Babv. llelen Ma«.Murchy, M.D. 
Free. The Provin('ial B¢)ard of llealth, Toronto. 
Farmers' Bulletins. Se eaeh. Department of Agricul- 
ture, Wa.hington, U.S.A. 

COOKING AND SEP,Â¥1NG 
*Boston ('ooking Schoo] Cook Book. Fariner, $?,.00. 
Mc('lel]and, (oodchild & Stewart, Ltd., Toronto. 
*Diet in I)isease. Pattee, $1.)0. Whitcomb & Barrow«, 
Boston. 
Elcmenls of the The«,rv and Practice ,f ('ookerv. 
Wi]liams & Fishcr. The Macmi]]an ('o. of Canada, 
Ltd.. Toronto. 
*Girls' lIome M«nua]. Anniê B. Juniper, British 
('o]umbia (;overmuent, Victoria, B.C. 
Prac.tk.a] ('ooking and erving. Hill, $1.50. Mc('lelland, 
(;,««h.hild &- Stewart, Ltd., Tor-nto. 

LAUNDRY WORK 
The Art and Practice of Laundry Work. Rankin, ls. 
Blackie &- ,q-n, Limited, London. Engand. 
The Expert ('leaner. Scaman, 75c. Mc('lelland, Good- 
cbi]d & 8tewart, Ltd., Toronto. 
*Bu]letins on "The Laundry". 5(, each. Department of 
IIome Economic., Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 225 

ll03iE NURSING 
Emergeneies. ;ulick, 4c. Ginn & Company, New 
York. 
*Home Nursing. IIarrison, $1.. The Macmi}|an Co. 
of Canada, Ltd, Toronto. 
Hints an,] IIelps for IIome Nursing and Hygiene. 
Cosgrave, 40< St. John .çmbulance Assn., Toronto. 
# 
ECONOMICS 
Home Problems from a Ne" Stan(]poinL IIun, $I.00. 
Whitcomb & Barrows, Boston. 
*IIousehold Management. Terrill. American School of 
Home Economics, Chicago, 
*The New llousekeeping. Frederiek, $1.00. Musson Buok 
Co., Toronto. 
MAGAZINES 
Good IIousekeeping Magazine. $2.00 per year. 119 
West Fortieth St., New York. 
*The Journal of Itome Economics. $3.0) per year. 525 
West l?.0th St., New York.